MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS & EARTH ... - Piti Group

MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS &
EARTH-LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
World Super
Series
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation's Fukuyama Works,
which produces these products, is certified as meeting
the ISO 14001:2004 environmental management system standard.
07
A

INDEX
This material has been prepared for those who use the products for
manufacturing assemblies, for holding electric works, for holding
maintenance and for the others acquainted with electric expertise
including those who operate the products (final users).
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 1
Features .............................................................................................................................................. 3
The Great Variable Accessories for Perfect Solution ...................................................................... 9
1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models ...................................................................... 11
2. Detailed Specifications ................................................................................................................. 13
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ........................................................................................................................................ 13
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... 21
Motor-Protection Breakers .............................................................................................................................................. 25
UL Listed Products .......................................................................................................................................................... 26
Miniature Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................................................................... 27
ELRs and ZCTs ................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Circuit Protectors ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
3. Special Purpose Breakers ............................................................................................................ 34
Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers) ............................................................................................................ 34
DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches ....................................................................................................................... 34
400Hz-Use MCCBs ........................................................................................................................................................... 35
Low-Instantaneous MCCBs ............................................................................................................................................. 35
Generator-Protection MCCBs ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Measuring Display Unit (MDU) Breakers ....................................................................................................................... 36
4. Connection Method ...................................................................................................................... 42
1. Connection Types
2. Connection Accessories
3. Connection of Line and Load
......................................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................................
42
42
42

Caution
The manual covers the product specifications for selecting an appropriate
low-voltage breaker. There is the “HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE”
describing how to handle the products. To use the products, separately
request the “HANDLING AND MAINTENANCE”, for correct operation.
1
5. Accessories ................................................................................................................................... 43
Internal Accessories .........................................................................................................................................................
1. Accessories ...............................................................................................................................................................................
2. Switch Operation and Rating .....................................................................................................................................................
3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories ..............................................................................................................
4. Shunt Trip (SHT) ........................................................................................................................................................................
5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT).............................................................................................................................................................
6. Test Button Module (TBM) .........................................................................................................................................................
7. Lead-wire Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................
8. Internal Terminal Type (INT) .......................................................................................................................................................
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT) ....................................................................................................................................
10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL) ..........................................................................................................................................................
11. Trip Indicator (TI) ......................................................................................................................................................................
12. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR) ...............................................................................................................................
External Accessories .......................................................................................................................................................
1. V-type Operating Handle ............................................................................................................................................................
2. F-type Operating Handle ............................................................................................................................................................
3. S-type Operating Handle............................................................................................................................................................
4. R-type Operating Handle ...........................................................................................................................................................
5. Terminal Cover ...........................................................................................................................................................................
6. Electrical Operation Device ........................................................................................................................................................
7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI) .........................................................................................................................................................
8. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder ......................................................................................................................................
9. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters ............................................................................................................................................
6. Characteristics and Dimensions..................................................................................................
71
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers ..................................................................................................... 71
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................................... 107
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................................... 131
Miniature Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................................................................ 143
DIN Series ....................................................................................................................................................................... 146
Circuit Protectors ........................................................................................................................................................... 151
7. Ordering Information................................................................................................................... 153
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................................... 153
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers ................................................................................................................................... 153
8. Melshort 2 .................................................................................................................................... 154
(A more rational and easier breakers selections)
9. Low-voltage switchgears Technical information service via the internet .............................. 155
(http://global.MitsubishiElectric.com/lvs)
43
43
43
44
49
49
50
50
50
51
52
53
53
54
54
55
57
58
60
61
69
70
70
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Full range of MITS
(30A to 16
High-Performance
Downsizing of 630AF, New Digital ETR
Previous
210
New
140
Glo
Compliance with w
ASTA
275
257
Time (s)
1 x 10 4 Ir
Switch
Current setting
with fuse
1 x 10 3
High
High-voltage fuse-
voltage
Allowable short-time
Ip
1 x 10 2
TL
characteristics
Low
Long-delay operating time
voltage
Transformer
Pre-alarm
10
NFB
current
Short-delay
(electronic)
Is
tripping current
M
1
Short-delay
Load
Load current
Ts operating time
0.1
Ii
Instantaneous tripping current
0.01
Current-converted value
Current (A) on the high-voltage side
EN
TUV
GB
CCC
TPC
JIS
Volume
60% downsized
New Digital ETR
IEC
SABS
Best Solution
Plenty of accessories, Easy installation
250AF (Type“SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”) Product Skelton
16
22
10
11 12 13
LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
World Super
17
23
7
8
9
18
24
6
19
15
14
1
20
21
1
5
4
7
8
9
3
2
Series
10
11
12
13
1

UBISHI WS Series
00A frame)
bal
orldwide standards
Relay
JPT
Reliable
High reliability, Best performance
Mechanism
Breaking Performance
Terminal
CSA
UL
Internal Accessories
Shunt-less Advanced ISTAC PA Auto-Puffer
External Accessories
Intelligent
Measuring and communicating
Personal
Computer
By using various application software for PLC, users can also connect to the
network SCADA system.
MELSECNET/10
Interface card
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link®
PLC
Interface
Unit
I/O Unit
Eco Monitor Pro
ME110S
AE-SW
MDU
2

Global
Compliance with worldwide standards
World Super
ASTA
EN
TUV
GB
CCC
JIS
CSA
UL
Series
TPC
IEC
SABS
LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
WS Series International Standard Conformance List
Safety Certification
Marine Approvals
IEC JIS EN GB
UL CSA LR GL DNV ABS BV NK
International Japan Europe
China
USA
Canada
UK Germany Norway USA France Japan
Standards
• Compliance with worldwide standards (IEC/JIS/EN/GB/UL/CSA)
• Applicable to marine approvals
• New design with Laser Marking
• All products with lsolation function
• RoHS compliance
RoHS…The Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
■ Full range of WS Series (up to 1600AF)
MCCB
ELCB
AF 32(30) 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
NF-C NF30-CS NF63-CW
NF-S NF32-SW NF63-SW
NF1000-SEW
NF-H
NF-U
NV-C
NV-S
NV-H
NV-U
NV30-CS
NV32-SW
NF63-HW
NV63-CW
NV63-SW
NV63-HW
NF125-CW
NF125-SW
NF125-SGW
NF125-HW
NF125-HGW
NF125-RGW
NF125-UGW
NV125-CW
NV125-SW
NV125-HW
NV125-RW
NF160-SW
NF160-SGW
NF160-HW
NF160-HGW
NF250-CW
NF250-SW
NF250-SGW
NF250-HW
NF250-HGW
NF250-RGW
NF250-UGW
NV250-CW
NV250-SW
NV250-SEW
NV250-HW
NV250-HEW
NV250-RW
NF400-CW
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW
NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
NF400-UEW
NV400-CW
NV400-SW
NV400-SEW
NV400-HEW
NV400-REW
NF630-CW
NF630-SW
NF630-SEW
NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
NV630-CW
NV630-SW
NV630-SEW
NV630-HEW
NF800-CEW
NF800-SEW
NF800-SDW
NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
NF800-UEW
NV800-SEW
NV800-HEW
NF250-SGW 3P
NF1250-SEW
NF1250-SDW
NF1600-SEW
NF1600-SDW
3

High-Performance
Downsizing,
New Digital ETR
World Super
Series
■ 400AF, 630AF & 800AF models easier to use
● 630AF models downsized to the size of 400AF model, contributing to
compact panels and simplification of design.
● MCCB-AC/DC common use (excl. Electronic trip type)
3-pole:available up to 400VDC, 4-pole:available up to 500VDC
(NF400-SW, NF630-SW)
Previous
210
New
140
● Improved breaking capacity at 690VAC (NF400-HEW, NF630-HEW)
275
257
Previous
Icu/Ics
15/15 kA
New
Icu/Ics
35/18 kA
Volume
60% downsized
● Improved breaking capacity at 400/415VAC (NF400-SEW, NF630-SW/SEW, NF800-SEW)
Previous
Icu/Ics
45/45 kA
New
Icu/Ics
50/50 kA
■ NEW Digital ETR (Electronic Trip Relay) for
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW & NF1600-SEW
● Installed digital ETR same as Electronic relay for under 800AF
• Multi adjustment available (Long time delay, short time delay,
Instantaneous, pre-alarm characteristics):easier coordination with upper
breakers.
• Pre-alarm equipped as Standard:LED turned on when load current
exceeds pre-alarm setting current.
• Suitable for use as a main breaker:isolation comformity to IEC Standard.
Rated current
Long time-delay
operating time
Current setting
Short time-delay
tripping current
Short time-delay
operating time
Pre-alarm
current
Instantaneous
tripping current
Time (s)
1 x 10 4 Ir
1 x 10 3
1 x 10 2
10
1
0.1
0.01
Previous
Current setting
Is
Current (A)
Short-delay
tripping current
Time (s)
New
1
Ir
Current setting
1 x 10 3
1 x 10 2
Ip
TL
Pre-alarm
10 current
1
Is
Load current
0.1
Ts
0.01
x 104 Current (A)
High-voltage fuse-
Allowable short-time
characteristics
Long-delay operating time
Ii
Short-delay
tripping current
Short-delay
operating time
Switch
with fuse
Instantaneous tripping current
Current-converted value
on the high-voltage side
High
voltage
Low
voltage
Transformer
NFB
(electronic)
M
Load
4

Reliable
High reliability, Best performance
■ Technology for WS Series
Relay
• Relay-unit Thermal type & Electronic type
• AC/DC common use
• Thermal adjustable range is expanded.
Mechanism
• Isolation suitability
• Class ll insulation
• Increased operating cycles
Breaking Performance
• Increased lcu
• High voltage
• Ics=100% lcu
JPT
Terminal
• IP20 Mold-cover Finger
protection
• Front compression terminal
⇔ Box terminal ⇔ Rear ⇔
PM
Internal Accessories
Shunt-less
Advanced ISTAC
PA Auto-Puffer
External Accessories
• Cassette-type accessories
• Wide range of Rated Voltage
• Electric operators
High speed type
Isolation suitability
• IP20 PM with Safety Device
• Handle Lock Device
• R/V handle
• IP40 Terminal cover
[PA Auto-Puffer]
Adopted on SGW,
Polymer Ablation type Auto-Puffer [ HGW, RGW, UGW]
[JPT]
Adopted on SGW,
Jet Pressure Trip Mechanism [ HGW, RGW, UGW]
[Advanced ISTAC]
Adopted on SGW,HGW,
Advanced Impulsive Slot-Type Accelerator [
RGW, UGW ]
[Shunt-less]
Adopted on SGW,
Shunt-less Current Flow Technology [ HGW, RGW, UGW]
Double plates conductors hold the movable conductor without
flexible wires. This shunt-less structure achieves the increased
operating cycles.
Holder
Movable contact
Endurance
(C-O cycles)
(times)
50,000
40,000
Electrical
Mechanical
30,000
20,000
10,000
0
NF125-SGW/HGW NF160-SGW/HGW NF250-SGW/HGW
Spring
Movable contact
revolving shaft
During revolution the movable contact is constantly
in contact with the holder, maintaining current flow.
5

LN326N429-11
MADE IN JAPAN
I
MADE IN JAPAN
LN326N433-1
World Super
Series
■ Best performance of SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW
Breaking Capacity lcu/lcs
(kA) 200 200 200 200 200
200
200
125
150
125 125 125 125 125
100
100
85 75 75
70
65
50
36
50
36
25 30
36 36
30 20
U(UGW)
0
230VAC
R(RGW)
380VAC
400VAC 415VAC 8 H(HGW)
440VAC
500VAC S(SGW) Series
690VAC
Max. peak current (kA)
(10 6 )
MAX. I 2 t (A 2 • s)
200
100
80
60
40
20
10
8
6
4
2
Max. let-through peak current (kA) (400VAC)
Prospective short-circuit
current asym. peak
NF250-HGW
NF250-UGW
1 1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
10
8
6
4
2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.1
0.08
0.06
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
I 2 t let-through characteristics (400VAC)
NF250-HGW
NF250-UGW
0.04
1 2 4 6 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 200
Short-Circuit Current, sym.r.m.s.(kA)
■ 2 types of Relay for SGW / HGW / RGW / UGW
Thermal Adjustable Relay
6 8
li(DC)=1.3Xli(AC) 4 10
li(X250A AC)
T
lr
li
MODEL
RT 250
ln 250 A
50/60Hz
3P3E
200
160
250
lr(A)
Rating ln(A) 25 40 63 100 125 160 250
Type
NF250-SGW/HGW
NF160-SGW/HGW
NF125-SGW/HGW Hi
Lo
Tripping threshold lr (A)
Neutral protection
(note 1) 4P3E
4P4E
Overload Protection (Thermal)
16-25 25-40 40-63 63-100 80-125 125-160 160-250
No Protection
1 lr
Short-Circuit Protection (Magnetic)
Fixed
Adjustable
Tripping threshold li
10ln (AC), 13ln (DC) 4 to 10ln (AC), 5.2 to 13ln(DC)
Note: (1) The type 4P3E is standard. If the type 4P4E is required, specify the type 4P4E separately and explicitly.
Thermal type unit
lr li l
Electronic Relay
T
MODEL
RE250 ln 250 A
AC only
50/60Hz
Ir (A)
TEST T L(s) Is (XIr)
Ts (s)
200
160
60 80
4 5
6
2
3.5
1
3
7
2.5
8
125
250 12
100 2
10 0.6
T
lp
TL
lr
Ii
ls
Ts
Ip
(X250A)
6
TL
Ir
Is
Ts
8 10
12
3 4 14 7
Ii
7.5
70%
li
Ip (XIr)
8
8.5 9
9.5
l
PAL
10
4P3E
OVER
I
pN
4P4E
Rating
Type
ln(A) (40C) 32 63 100 125 160 250
NF250-SGW/HGW
NF160-SGW/HGW
Hi
NF125-SGW/HGW
Lo
Tripping threshold lr (A)
Tripping time TL(s)
LTD
Neutral protection (Slectable)
STD
INST
PAL
Pickup current ls
Tripping time Ts(s)
Tripping threshold li
Pickup current lp
Operating time Tp
70%-LED (green)
PAL-LED (orange)
Over-LED (red)
Overload Protection
16-32 32-63 63-100 75-125 80-160 125-250
12-60-80-100 step adjustable (at 2 lr)
0-1 lr (Step adjustable)
Short-Circuit Protection
2-2.5-3-3.5-4-5-6-7-8-10 lr step adjustable
0.06-0.1-0.2-0.3 step adjustable (at 1.5 ls)
4 to 14 ln continuous adjustable
Pre-Alarm (for Indication)
0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1.0 lr step adjustable
TL/2
Indicator (LED)
Lights at 0.7 lr
Flashs at lp and Lights at over Tp
Lights at 1.15 lr
Electronic type unit
6

Best Solution
Plenty of Accessories, Easy installation
Internal Accessories
Internal accessories become easier to use by adopting a cassette type.
Common use of different voltages realizes the major reduction in types.
The UVT for ELCB is also available. Time delay type variations have
also been expanded, offering a wide range of applications.
3 Way Lead Wire (Selectable)
Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SHT)
Previous models
WS Series (New)
SHT
voltuge
AC (V)
DC (V)
(24), (48), 100-120, 200-240,
380-450, (440-550)
(12), (24), (36), (48), 100, (110), (125), (220)
24-48, 100-240, 380-550
12, 24-36, 36-48, 100-125, 220-250
UVT
voltuge
AC (V)
100-110, (100-120), 200-220, (220-240),
(380-415), 400-440, (440-480), (500-550)
DC (V) (24), (48), 100, (110)
24/48, 100-110/120-130, 200-220/230-250,
380-415/440-480, 500-550/690
24/48, 100/110, 110/125
Lead-wire to Line side
Flying Lead-wire
Cassette-type Accessories
Cassette-type accessories give greater flexbility when
upgrading circuits.
Easier ordering and one-touch simple installation become
possible. The insulation function increases its safety.
Fits all breaker series
The alarm switch (AL), auxiliary switch (AX), shunt trip (SHT),
and undervoltage trip (UVT) all come as cassette-type
accessories to suit all breaker series.
1.Push the trip button
(PTT)
2.Loosen the front
cover screws
3.Open the front
cover
4.Install the
accessories
5.Close the front cover
and tighten the screws.
External Accessories
Hight-speed Motor Device
Motor devices for 125-250AF become easier to use:contributing to the
simple installation.
Adoption of a spring charge mechanism for high-speed operation
(0.05~0.1seconds)
Swift and simple installation by tightening only two screws.
Power Supply Module
External Handle
Adoption of a safer and easy to operate handle.
Complying with protection degree IP65.
Isolation function achieved through combination with the breaker unit.
Structured to allow relay adjustments after installation as well.
Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent false operation.
V-Handle
R-Handle
IP-20PM with Safety Device
[Adopted on SGW, HGW]
Specialized for 3-and4-pole use (2 pole incompatible).
Complies with the protection degree IP20.
Safety device supplied as an option.
May be connected with up to nine leads (for PLT).
May be modified from front connection to rear connection.
(Note: Modification by end users not authorized)
IP20: Finger protection.
(IP-20PM)
7

World Super
Series
Product design which pursues greater ease of use by wide variations
IP-20 Terminal Connection
With the SGW, HGW,
connection safety has been
increased.
Standard IP-20 protection
degree ensured.
Terminal Cover
Major improvements have been achieved
in front connection terminal safety.
With terminal covers, IP40 protection
degree is ensured.
(Type “SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”)
Variable Connections
Compatible with various
connection methods.
Solderless terminals are
now built inside the
breaker contrary to the
conventional style where
terminals were built
outside.
Maximum connecting Cable of 185mm 2 (SGW/HGW).
(Note: Certain models have externally attached terminals)
IEC Rail Mounting for 32, 63AF
The 32,63AF includes
installation hooks to IEC rails,
greatly simplifying installation
works.
Handle Locks
With the WS Series, ON/OFF locking is
possible with the padlock.
Up to three padlocks may be attached.
Customers are requested their own
padlocks.
ON Lock
OFF Lock
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock
(Type “SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW”)
Intelligent
Measuring and communicating
• MDU (Measuring Display Unit) with NF 250-800AF
• Small and white measuring unit
• Measuring data can be transmitted to PC or PLC through CC-Link
• AL / AX with CC-Link transmission
• Improved accuracy(Electric energy): ±2.5% of rated value → ±2.5% of true value
Personal
Computer
By using various application software for PLC, users can also connect to the network
SCADA system.
MELSECNET/10
Interface card
MELSECNET/10
CC-Link®
PLC
Interface
Unit
I/O Unit
Eco Monitor Pro
ME110S
AE-SW
MDU
8

Product Skelton
16
10
22
17
23
18
24
19
20
5
4
21
10
9

World Super
Series
11 12 13
7
8
9
6
1 MCCB
2 Relay unit (Thermal type) (RT)*
3 Relay unit (Electronic type) (RE)*
4 Relay unit (Magnetic only type) (RM)*
5 Relay unit (Switch-disconnector type)*
6 Super current-limiting unit*
7 Solderless (BOX) terminals
8 Front connection nuts
9 Rear connections
10 Insulating barrier (BA-F)
11 Small terminal cover (TC-S)
12 Large terminal cover (TC-L)
13 Rear terminal cover (BTC)
14 Plug-in base (PM)
15 Connections for Plug-in
16 Mechanical interlock device (MI)
17 OFF Lock with 3 Padlock (HLF3)
18 Handle lock device (LC/HLF/HLN/HLS)
19 Variable-depth operating handle (V type)
20 Rotary operating handle (R type)
21 Electrical operation device (MD)
22 Alarm/Auxiliary switch device (AL/AX)
23 Under voltage trip device (UVT)
24 Shunt trip device (SHT)
Note *: All the accessories are field mounting type
except No.2, 3, 4, 5 and 6.
15
14
1
7
8
9
3
2
11
12
13
10

1. Series Configuration and List of Product Models
Series Configuration
Molded-case circuit breakers
NF-C
Economy type
NF-S
Standard type
NF-H
High-performance
type
NF-U
Current limiting-type
ultra breaker
Earth-leakage circuit breakers
NV-C
Economy type
NV-S
Standard type
NV-H
High-performance
type
NV-U
Ultra current-limiting
type
Motor-protection breakers
MB
Motor breaker
Circuit protectors
CP30-BA CP-B CP-S
For equipment
Miniature circuit breakers
BH BH-P BH-S BH-PS BH-D6 BH-DN BV-D BV-DN KB-D
NEMA-type for consumer unit
DIN-series for general consumer unit
11

1
List of Product Models
Series
NF-C
Economy type
Molded-case circuit breaker
Earth-leakage circuit breaker
Motor-protection
breaker
NF-S
Standard type
NF-H
High-performance type
NF-U
Ultra current-limiting type
NV-C
Economy type
NV-S
Standard type
Frame A
NV-H
High-performance type
NV-U
Ultra current-limiting type
32 (30) 63 125 (100) 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
NF30-CS NF63-CW NF125-CW NF250-CW NF400-CW NF630-CW
NF32-SW
NF63-SW
NF63-HW
NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW
NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
NF1000-SEW
NF125-SGW NF160-SGW NF250-SGW NF400-SEW NF630-SEW NF800-SEW
NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
NF125-HW NF160-HW NF250-HW NF400-HEW NF630-HEW NF800-HEW
NF125-HGW NF160-HGW NF250-HGW NF400-REW NF630-REW NF800-REW
NF125-RGW NF250-RGW NF400-UEW NF800-UEW NF1250-UR
NF125-UGW
NF250-UGW
NV30-CS NV63-CW NV125-CW NV250-CW NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV32-SW
NV63-SW
NV63-HW
NV125-SW
NV125-HW
NV125-RW
NV250-SW NV400-SW NV630-SW
NV800-SEW
NV250-SEW NV400-SEW NV630-SEW
NV250-HW NV400-HEW
NV630-HEW NV800-HEW
NV250-HEW NV400-REW
NV250-RW
MB30-CS MB50-CW
MB
Motor breaker MB100-SW MB225-SW
MB30-SW MB50-SW
NF800-CEW
NF-UL
UL489 Listed
Molded-case circuit breaker
UL listed products
NV-UL
Earth-leakage protector
UL489 Listed
Molded-case circuit breaker
Frame A
Series
UL489 Listed
Molded-case circuit breaker
UL listed
products
Earth-leakage protector
UL489 Listed
Molded-case circuit breaker
Details will be available
( upon request. )
50 100 150 225 250 400 600
NF50-SWU NF100-CWU NF-SJW
NF-SFW NF225-CWU NF-SKW NF-SLW
NF100-SWU
NF-HJW
NV50-SWU
NV100-SWU
NV225-CWU
NV-SKW
Details will be available
( upon request. )
Miniature Circuit Breakers
AF 60 100
BH
BH-P
BH
BH-S —
BH-PS —
DIN Series
AF 63 and less
MCB
RCCB
RCBO
Isolating
switch
BH-D6
BH-DN
BV-D
BV-DN
KB-D
Circuit Protectors
AF 30 and less
CP30-BA
CP CP-B
CP-S
12

2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series
Frame Size
C series
30
S series C series S series
H series
C series
32
63
63
63
125
Photo
Type name
NF30-CS
NF32-SW
NF63-CW
NF63-SW
NF63-HW
NF125-CW
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated
short-circuit
breaking
capacities (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
(50/60Hz)
DC
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
without current
Number of operating cycles
Overall dimensions (mm)
with current
690V
525V
500V
440V
415V
400V
380V
230V
250V
300V
440V-In/2
440V-In
690V-In/2
690V-In
a
b
c
ca
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Screw terminal
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Fixed
Busbar terminal
Installation
and
Rear
(B)
connections
Rear
(PM)
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20
(PM-IP)
IEC 35mm
rail
Mounting hook (option)
Adapter (option)
Alarm switch
(AL)
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch
(AX)
accessories Shunt trip
(SHT)
(option) ✽5
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block
(SLT)
connection with Internal terminal type
(INT)
(option) with Flying leads
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽3
(PAL)
accessories Overcurrent trip alarm ✽3
(OAL)
(option) Cylinder key lock Available soon
(S)
Dustproof
Enclosure
( I )
Waterproof
(W)
Electrical operation device
(MD)
Mechanical interlock
(MI)
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL)
(HL-S)
Lock cover
(LC)
External
accessories
(V)
External Door mounting
(option)
(S)
operating
handle
(R)
Mounted on breaker
(F)
Insulating Between phase
(BA-F)
barrier To ground
(BA-G)
Large
(TC-L)
Small
(TC-S)
Terminal
cover
Transparent
(TTC)
for rear connection
(BTC)
for plug-in
(PTC)
L/R
G/L
Marine approval
BV
DNV
ABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 500V DC.
✽2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 500V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 600V DC.
✽3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
✽4: Specify if for DC use.
✽5: Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF30-CS.
a
b
ca c
3 5 10
15 20 30
40
2 3
500
–
–
–
–
1.5/1.5
1.5/1.5
1.5/1.5
2.5/2 (240V)
–
–
–
A
–
4
2
10,000
6,000 (415V)
6,000 (415V)
–
–
45 67.5
96
52
67
0.25 0.35
●
–
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
–
●
–
–
–
●
–
–
–
–
●
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
–
–
●
Hydraulicmagnetic
–
3 4 (5) 6 10 (15)
16 20 25 (30) 32
40
2 3
600
–
–
2.5/1
2.5/1
2.5/1
5/2
5/2
7.5/4
2.5/1 ✽4 –
–
●
A
●
6
2
10,000
6,000
6,000
–
–
50 75
130
68
90
0.4 0.55
●
–
–
●
●
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
– ●
–
●
●
●
●
– ●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Hydraulicmagnetic
Equipped
3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20
25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63
40
2 3
600
–
–
2.5/1
2.5/1
2.5/1
5/2
5/2
7.5/4
2.5/1 ✽4 –
–
●
A
●
6
2
10,000
6,000
6,000
–
–
50 75
130
68
90
0.45 0.6
●
–
–
●
●
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
– ●
–
●
●
●
●
– ●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Hydraulicmagnetic
Equipped
Line
3-pole
3 4 (5) 6 10 (15) 16 20
25 (30) 32 40 50 (60) 63
40
40
2 3 4 2 3 4
7.5/4 ✽4
600
–
–
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
– 7.5/4 ✽4
690
2.5/1
–
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
10/5
10/5
25/13
–
–
●
–
●
A
●
A
●
50
6
2
15,000
15,000
8,000
–
–
75 100 50
6
2
15,000
15,000
8,000
–
-–
75 100
0.45
130
68
90
0.6 0.7 0.45
130
68
90
0.6 0.7
●
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
● – ● –
● – ● –
–
– – ● –
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Hydraulicmagnetic
Equipped
Line
Load
–
–
–
–
–
10 (15) 16 20 25 (30)
32 40 50 (60) 63
–
4-pole
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Hydraulicmagnetic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
–
Load
50 (60) 63 (75) 80
100 125
40
2 3
600
–
–
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
10/5
10/5
30/15
7.5/4 ✽1
–
●
A
●
8
3
10,000
6,000
6,000
–
–
60 90
130
68
90
0.65 0.9
●
●
–
●
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
13

2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
S series
NF125-SW
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125
40
690
8/4
18/5
18/9
25/13
30/15
30/15
30/15
50/25
–
A
8
3
25,000
20,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
130
68
90
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
125
15/8 ✽1
60
0.7
90 120
0.95 1.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
NF125-SGW
RT
16–25 25–40 40–63
63–100 80–125
40
–
690
8/8
22/22
30/30
36/36
36/36
36/36
36/36
85/85
A
8
3
50,000
40,000
30,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– –
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
NF125-SGW
RE
16–32 32–63 63–100
75–125
40
3 4
690
8/8
22/22
30/30
36/36
36/36
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
A
8
3
50,000
40,000
30,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
2.0 2.6
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
20/20 ✽2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
NF125-HW
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100
40
690
10/5
22/11
30/15
50/25
50/25
50/25
50/25
100/50
–
A
8
3
25,000
20,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
130
68
90
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
40/20 ✽1
0.8 0.95
90 120
1.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
H series
–
Electronic
125
NF125-HGW
RT
16–25 25–40 40–63
63–100 80–125
40
690
20/20
35/35
50/50
65/65
70/70
75/75
75/75
100/100
A
8
3
50,000
40,000
30,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
NF125-HGW
RE
16–32 32–63 63–100
75–125
40
3 4
690
20/20
35/35
50/50
65/65
70/70
75/75
75/75
100/100
–
–
A
8
3
50,000
40,000
30,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
Equipped
105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
2.0 2.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
40/40 ✽2
U series
NF125-RGW
RT
16–25 25–40
40–63 63–100
40
2 3
690
25/25
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
–
A
8
3
50,000
40,000
30,000
1,000
1,000
240
105
3.1
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Equipped
NF125-UGW
RT
16–25 25–40
40–63 63–100
40
690
30/30
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
A
8
3
50,000
40,000
30,000
1,000
1,000
240
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
125
–
– –
105 140
3.1 3.9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
14

2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series
Frame Size
S series
160
H series
160
Photo
Type name
NF160-SW
NF160-SGW
RT
NF160-SGW
RE
NF160-HW
NF160-HGW
RT
NF160-HGW
RE
Rated current In (Amp.)
125 150 160
125–160
80–160
125 150 160
125–160
80–160
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated
short-circuit
breaking
capacities (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
(50/60Hz)
DC
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
without current
Number of operating cycles
Overall dimensions (mm)
with current
690V
525V
500V
440V
415V
400V
380V
230V
250V
300V
440V-In/2
440V-In
690V-In/2
690V-In
a
b
c
ca
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Screw terminal
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Fixed
Busbar terminal
Installation
and
Rear
(B)
connections
Rear
(PM)
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20
(PM-IP)
IEC 35mm
rail
Mounting hook (option)
Adapter (option)
Alarm switch
(AL)
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch
(AX)
accessories Shunt trip
(SHT)
(option)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block
(SLT)
connection with Internal terminal type
(INT)
(option) with Flying leads
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽3
(PAL)
accessories Overcurrent trip alarm ✽3
(OAL)
(option) Cylinder key lock Available soon
(S)
Dustproof
Enclosure
( I )
Waterproof
(W)
Electrical operation device
(MD)
Mechanical interlock
(MI)
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL)
(HL-S)
Lock cover
(LC)
External
accessories
(V)
External Door mounting
(option)
(S)
operating
handle
(R)
Mounted on breaker
(F)
Insulating Between phase
(BA-F)
barrier To ground
(BA-G)
Large
(TC-L)
Small
(TC-S)
Terminal
cover
Transparent
(TTC)
for rear connection
(BTC)
for plug-in
(PTC)
L/R
G/L
Marine approval
BV
DNV
ABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽1: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 500V DC.
✽2: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 500V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 600V DC.
✽3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
a
b
ca c
2
40
3
690
–
–
15/8
25/13
30/15
30/15
30/15
50/25
15/8 ✽1
–
●
A
●
6
2
12,000
4,000
4,000
–
–
1,000
1,000
105 140 105 140 105 140
165
165
165
68
86
86
92
110
110
1.3 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.6 2.0 2.6
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
–
●
●
● –
–
–
● – ● – ● –
● – ● – ● –
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
4
2
40
3
690
8/8
22/22
30/30
36/36
36/36
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
20/20 ✽2
●
A
●
8
3
40,000
30,000
20,000
1,000
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
40
3 4
690
8/8
22/22
30/30
36/36
36/36
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
40,000
30,000
20,000
1,000
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
Line
Electronic
Equipped
3-pole
2
40
3 4 2
40
3 4
690
5/3
–
30/8
50/13
50/13
50/13
50/13
100/25
690
20/20
35/35
50/50
65/65
70/70
75/75
75/75
100/100
40/20 ✽1
–
–
●
40/40 ✽2
●
A
●
A
●
6
2
12,000
4,000
4,000
1,000
1,000
8
3
40,000
30,000
20,000
1,000
1,000
105 140 105 140
165
68
92
165
86
110
1.3 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.6
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
– ● – ●
– ● – ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
Line
Load
4-pole
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
Load
40
3 4
690
20/20
35/35
50/50
65/65
70/70
75/75
75/75
100/100
–
–
●
A
●
8
3
40,000
30,000
20,000
1,000
1,000
105 140
165
86
110
2.0 2.6
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
15

2
C series S series H series U series
3 4 3 4
NF250-SW
(100) 125 150 175
200 225 250
40
690
–
–
15/8
25/13
30/15
30/15
30/15
50/25
–
A
6
2
12,000
4,000
4,000
–
-–
165
68
92
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
2.0 2.6
250
NF250-SGW
RT
125–160 160–250
40
690
8/8
22/22
30/30
36/36
36/36
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
A
8
3
25,000
15,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
NF250-SGW
RE
125–250
40
690
8/8
22/22
30/30
36/36
36/36
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
A
8
3
25,000
15,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
Electronic
Equipped
NF250-HW
125 150 175
200 225 250
40
690
5/3
–
30/8
50/13
50/13
50/13
50/13
100/25
–
A
6
2
12,000
4,000
4,000
1,000
1,000
165
68
92
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
NF250-HGW
RT
125–160
160–250
40
690
20/20
35/35
50/50
65/65
70/70
75/75
75/75
100/100
–
A
8
3
25,000
15,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
250
NF250-HGW
RE
125–250
40
–
690
20/20
35/35
50/50
65/65
70/70
75/75
75/75
100/100
–
A
8
3
25,000
15,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
165
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
105
3.1
2 3
250
NF250-RGW
RT
125–160 160–225
40
690
25/25
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
–
A
8
3
25,000
15,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
240
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
Thermalmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
NF250-UGW
RT
125–160 160–225
40
690
30/30
–
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
A
8
3
25,000
15,000
10,000
1,000
1,000
240
86
110
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Equipped
2 3 4
2 3 4
1.3 1.5 1.9
15/8 ✽1
20/20 ✽2 40/40 ✽2
40/20 ✽1
–
105 140 105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140 105 140
2.0 2.6
105 140
3.1 3.9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
3
2
1.9
1.5
1.3
4
3
2 4
3
2
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● –
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● ● ●
–
250
NF250-CW
(100) 125 150 175
200 225 250
40
2 3
10/5 ✽1
105
600
–
–
10/5
15/8
18/9
18/9
18/9
35/18
–
A
6
2
8,000
4,000
4,000
–
–
165
68
92
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
1.3 1.5
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
16

2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series
Frame Size
C series
400
S series
400
400
H series
400
Photo
Type name
NF400-CW
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW
NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
Rated current In (Amp.)
250 300 350 400
250 300 350 400
200~400
adjustable
200~400
adjustable
200~400
adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated
short-circuit
breaking
capacities (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
(50/60Hz)
DC
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA)
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
a ca c
Overall dimensions (mm)
b
690V
500V
440V
415V
400V
380V
230V
250V
a
b
c
ca
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Screw terminal
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Installation Fixed
Busbar terminal
and
connections
Rear
(B)
Rear
(PM)
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20
(PM-IP)
Alarm switch
(AL)
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch
(AX)
accessories Shunt trip
(SHT)
(option)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block
(SLT)
connection with Internal terminal type
(INT)
(option) with Flying leads
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽3
(PAL)
accessories
(option)
Overcurrent trip alarm ✽3
Trip indicator
(OAL)
(TI)
(S)
Dustproof
Enclosure
( I )
Waterproof
(W)
Motoroperated
type
Electrical
(MD)
operation
device
Springcharge
type
(MDS)
Mechanical interlock
(MI)
(HL)
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL-S)
External Lock cover
(LC)
accessories
(option)
(V)
External Door mounting
(S)
operating
handle
(R)
Mounted on breaker
(F)
Insulating Between phase
(BA-F)
barrier To ground
(BA-G)
Large
(TC-L)
Small
(TC-S)
Terminal
cover
Transparent
(TTC)
for rear connection
(BTC)
for plug-in
(PTC)
L/R
G/L
Marine approval
BV
DNV
ABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
40
2 3
690
–
15/8
25/13
36/18
36/18
40/20
50/25
20/10 ✽4
●
A
–
●
8
3
140
257
103
134
4.7 5.5
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
Notes ✽1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ).
✽2: Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is
necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
✽3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
✽4: Use two poles in the case of three-pole or four-pole products.
In addition, wiring as shown to the right allows the three poles to be used
for up to 400V DC and the four poles to be used for up to 500V DC.
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
40
2 3 4
690
10/10(5/5) ✽1
30/30(25/25) ✽1
42/42(36/36) ✽1
45/45(36/36) ✽1
45/45(36/36) ✽1
50/50(42/42) ✽1
85/85(65/65) ✽1
40/40 ✽4
●
A
–
●
8
3
140 185
4.9
257
103
155
5.7 7.5
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Line
40
3 4
690
10/10(5/5) ✽1
30/30(25/25) ✽1
42/42(36/36) ✽1
50/50(36/36) ✽1
50/50(36/36) ✽1
50/50(42/42) ✽1
85/85(65/65) ✽1
–
●
B
5
●
8
3
140 185
257
103
155
6.5 8.3
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
3-pole
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
Electronic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Line
Load
40
3 4
690
35/18
50/50
65/65
70/70
70/70
70/70
100/100
–
●
B
5
●
8
3
140 185
257
103
155
6.5 8.3
–
–
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
Electronic
Equipped
4-pole
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
Load
40
3
690
–
70/35
125/63
125/63
125/63
125/63
150/75
–
●
B
5
●
8
3
140
257
103
155
6.5
–
–
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
Electronic
Equipped
17

2
–
C series
S series
630
NF630-CW
500 600 630
40
690
–
18/9
36/18
36/18
36/18
40/20
50/25
A
8
3
257
103
257
103
257
103
155
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
630
H series
630
3 4
140
4
3
2
U series
400
3 4
140 280
297 322
NF400-UEW
200~400
adjustable
–
B
5
●
8
3
200
252
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
40
690
–
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
–
–
16.7 26.1
2 3
20/10 ✽4
5.2 6.0
NF630-SW
500 600 630
40
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
50/50
50/50
85/85
A
155
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
40/40 ✽4
140 185
8.0
6.2
5.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
NF630-SEW
300~630
adjustable
40
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
50/50
50/50
85/85
B
– – 7.6
155
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
140
6.5
185
8.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
8
3
8
3
257
103
3 4
NF630-HEW
300~630
adjustable
40
690
35/18
50/50
65/65
70/70
70/70
70/70
100/100
B
7.6
155
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
140 185
6.5 8.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
8
3
630
257
103
NF630-REW
300~630
adjustable
40
3
690
–
70/35
125/63
125/63
125/63
125/63
150/75
B
7.6
155
6.5
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
●
Electronic
Equipped
–
–
8
3
140
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
18

2. Detailed Specifications
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Series
Frame Size
C series
800
S series
800
H series
800
Photo
Type name
NF800-CEW
NF800-SDW
NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
Rated current In (Amp.)
400~800
adjustable
(700) 800
400~800
adjustable
400~800
adjustable
400~800
adjustable
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated
short-circuit
breaking
capacities (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
(50/60Hz)
DC
Suitability for isolation
Utilization category
Rated short-time withstand current low (kA)
Reverse connection (terminals unmarked)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Pollution degree
a ca c
Overall dimensions (mm)
b
690V
500V
440V
415V
400V
380V
230V
250V
Mass of front-face type (kg)
Screw terminal
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Installation Fixed
Busbar terminal
and
connections
Rear
(B)
Rear
(PM)
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20
(PM-IP)
Alarm switch
(AL)
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch
(AX)
accessories Shunt trip
(SHT)
(option) ✽5
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Non-Synchronous Closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous Closing (UVT-S)
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block
(SLT)
connection with Internal terminal type
(INT)
(option) with Flying leads
Built-in Pre-alarm (contact output) ✽3
(PAL)
accessories
(option)
Overcurrent trip alarm ✽3
Trip indicator
(OAL)
(TI)
(S)
Dustproof
Enclosure
( I )
Waterproof
(W)
Motoroperated
type
Electrical
(MD)
operation
device
Springcharge
type
(MDS)
Mechanical interlock
(MI)
(HL)
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL-S)
External
Lock cover
(LC)
accessories
(option)
(V)
External Door mounting
(S)
operating
handle
(R)
Mounted on breaker
(F)
Insulating Between phase
(BA-F)
barrier To ground
(BA-G)
Large
(TC-L)
Small
(TC-S)
Terminal
cover
Transparent
(TTC)
for rear connection
(BTC)
for plug-in
(PTC)
L/R
G/L
Marine approval
BV
DNV
ABS
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
Notes ✽1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / ).
✽2: Solid state relay output is option . Please specify if other output is
necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
✽3: Both PAL and OAL is not available. Only one specified.
✽4: Specify if for DC use.
✽5: Cassette-type accessories are not suitable for NF1000-SW,
NF1250-SW, NF1250-SDW, NF1600-SW, and NF1600-SDW.
a
b
c
ca
40
3
690
–
18/9
36/18
36/18
36/18
40/20
50/25
–
●
B
9.6
●
8
3
210
275
103
155
10.9
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
Electronic
Equipped
40
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
40/40 ✽4
●
A
–
●
8
3
210
275
103
155
9
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
40
3 4
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
50/50
50/50
85/85
–
●
B
9.6
●
8
3
210 280
275
103
155
10.9 14.2
–
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
● –
● –
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
–
40
3 4
690
15/15
50/50
65/65
70/70
70/70
70/70
100/100
–
●
B
9.6
●
8
3
210 280
275
103
155
10.9 14.2
–
–
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
–
● –
● –
● –
– –
● –
Electronic
Equipped
40
3
690
–
70/35
125/63
125/63
125/63
125/63
150/75
–
●
B
9.6
●
8
3
210
275
103
155
10.9
–
–
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
●
–
●
Electronic
Equipped
19

2
210 280
406
–
B
20
●
8
3
140
190
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
85/43
85/43
125/63
–
–
23.5 30.7
1000
3 4
NF1000-SEW
40
690
–
–
– –
– –
–
–
–
–
–
210 280
406
–
B
20
●
8
3
140
190
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
85/43
85/43
125/63
–
–
23.5 30.7
1250
S series
1600
3 4
NF1250-SEW
40
690
–
–
–
–
–
600~1250
adjustable
406
40/20 ✽4
A
–
●
8
3
210
140
190
22
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
NF1250-SDW
40
2
690
1000 1250
–
–
– –
– –
–
210 280
406
–
B
20
●
8
3
140
190
–
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
85/43
85/43
125/63
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
34.5 41.2
3 4
NF1600-SEW
40
690
–
–
–
–
–
800~1600
adjustable
406
40/20 ✽4
A
–
●
8
3
210
140
190
32
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
Magnetic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
NF1600-SDW
40
2
690
1600
210 280
322
–
B
9.6
8
3
200
252
–
–
–
–
● ✽2
–
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Equipped
–
35/35
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
27.6 33.7
– –
800
U series
3 4
NF800-UEW
400~800
adjustable
500~1000
adjustable
40
690
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
20

2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Series
Frame size
C series S series C series S series
H series C series
30
32
63
63
63
125
Photo
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V)
NV30-CS
5 10 15
20 30
40
3
NV32-SW
(5) 6 10 (15) 16
20 25 (30) 32
40
3
NV63-CW
(5) (10) (15) 16 20 25
(30) 32 40 50 (60) 63
40
3
NV63-SW
(5) (10) (15) 16 20 25
(30) 32 40 50 (60) 63
40
3
NV63-HW
(15) 16 20 25 (30)
32 40 50 (60) 63
40
3
NV125-CW
(60) 63 (75) 80
100 125
40
3
✽6
100–230
100–440
100–440
100–440
100–440
100–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500
High-speed type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30
Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
0.04
–
0.04
–
0.04
–
0.04
–
0.04
–
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
Time-delay type
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s)
–
–
–
–
–
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
–
Button
–
Button
–
Button
–
Button
–
Button
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
AC440V
–
5/2
2.5/1
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
AC400V
–
5/2
5/2
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC230V 2.5/2
10/5
7.5/4
15/8
25/13
30/15
without current
10,000
10,000
10,000
15,000
15,000
10,000
Number of operating cycles
440V-In/2 6,000 (230V) 6,000
6,000
15,000
15,000
6,000
with current
440V-In 6,000 (230V) 6,000
6,000
8,000
8,000
6,000
a ca c
a
67.5
75
75
75
75
90
Overall dimensions (mm)
b
96
130
130
130
130
130
b
c
ca
52
67
68
90
68
90
68
90
68
90
68
90
Mass of front-face type (kg)
0.4
0.6
0.65
0.65
0.65
1.0
Screw terminal
●
●
●
●
●
●
Fixed
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Busbar terminal
–
–
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
●
●
Installation and
Rear
(B) ●
●
●
●
●
●
connections
Rear
(PM) –
●
●
●
●
●
Plug-in
Rear/front IP20
(PM-IP) –
–
–
–
–
–
IEC 35mm
rail
Mounting hook (option)
Adapter (option)
–
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
–
●
Alarm switch
(AL) ●
●
●
●
●
●
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch
(AX) ●
●
●
●
●
●
accessories Shunt trip
(SHT) –
–
–
–
–
–
(option) ✽2
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N) –
●
●
●
●
●
Synchronous closing (UVT-S) –
–
–
–
–
●
Insulation switch
(MG) ●
●
●
●
●
●
Built-in Earth-leakage trip alarm
(EAL) –
●
●
●
●
●
accessories
(option)
Test button module
Pre-alarm-contact output
Cylinder key lock Available soon
(TBM)
(PAL)
–
–
–
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
–
●
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block
(SLT) ●
●
●
●
●
●
connection (option) with Flying leads
●
●
●
●
●
●
Enclosure
Dustproof
(S) ●
●
●
●
●
●
( I ) –
●
●
●
●
●
Waterproof
(W) –
●
●
●
●
●
Electrical operation device
(MD) –
–
–
–
–
●
Mechanical interlock
(MI) –
●
●
●
●
●
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL) –
●
●
●
●
●
(HL-S) –
●
●
●
●
●
Lock cover
(LC) ●
●
●
●
●
●
External
(V) –
●
●
●
accessories External Door mounting
●
●
(S) –
●
●
●
●
●
(option) operating
handle
(R) –
–
–
–
–
●
Mounted on breaker
(F) –
●
●
●
●
●
Insulating Between phase
(BA-F) –
●
●
●
●
●
barrier To ground
(BA-G) –
●
●
●
●
●
Large
(TC-L) ●
●
●
●
●
●
Small
(TC-S) ●
●
●
●
●
Terminal
●
cover
Transparent
(TTC) ●
●
●
●
●
●
for rear connection
(BTC) ●
●
●
●
●
●
for plug-in
(PTC) –
●
●
●
●
●
Automatic tripping device
Hydraulicmagnetimagnetimagnetimagnetimagnetimagnetic
Hydraulic-
Hydraulic-
Hydraulic-
Hydraulic-
Thermal-
Trip button
CE marking
✽7
Equipped ✽5
–
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Note ✽1: 125A rated current is 3p only.
✽2: Cassette-type aaccessories are not acceptable for NV30-CS.
✽3: Standard type is thus SLT equipped.
✽4: In case of ampere rating 15A and 16A, time-delay type is not available.
✽5: Included in AL (type) only.
✽6: Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
✽7: Specify if for CE marking. In case of the CE marking article of 250A Frame or less, outside sizes differ.
Rated operational voltage Available voltage range
100 - 230V
80~253V
100 - 440V
80~484V
200 - 440V 160~484V
21

S series
125
H series
125
U series
125
C series
250
S series
250
H series
250
U series
250
NV125-SW
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
– ● –
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
–
–
●
–
–
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ✽3
● ✽3
● ✽3
● ✽3
●
●
●
● ✽3
● ✽3
● ✽3
● ✽3
● ✽3
– – –
–
– ● ✽3
–
● ✽3
●
●
– – – –
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
– ● –
● – ● –
–
–
–
–
●
●
–
–
●
●
–
–
●
●
–
–
●
●
–
–
●
●
NV125-HW
✽4 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50 ✽4 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
(60) 63 (75) 80 100 125 ✽1
40
(60) 63 (75) 80 100
40
3
100–440
4
200–440
3
100–440
4
200–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 •200 •500 30,100 •200 •500
Selectable
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
Selectable
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
25,000
20,000
10,000
50/25
50/25
100/50
25,000
20,000
10,000
90 120 90 120
130
68
90
130
68
90
1.1 1.4 1.1 1.4
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
NV125-RW
✽4 (15) 16 20 (30) 32 40 50
(60) 63 (75) 80 100
40
3
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
125/125
125/125
125/125
25,000
20,000
10,000
90
191
68
90
1.8
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermalmagnetic
NV250-CW
125 150 175
200 225 250
40
3
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30,100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
15/8
18/9
35/18
8,000
4,000
4,000
105
165
68
92
1.7
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
–
●
–
●
● ✽3
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermalmagnetic
NV250-SW
125 150 175 125 150 175
200 225 250 200 225
40
3 4
100–440 200–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
12,000
4,000
4,000
105 140
165
68
92
1.7 2.1
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
NV250-SEW
125–225
Adjustable
40
3 4
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
12,000
4,000
4,000
105 140
165
68
92
●
–
–
NV250-HW
125 150 175
200 225
40
3 4
100–440 200–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
50/13
50/13
100/25
12,000
4,000
4,000
105 140
165
68
92
1.7 2.1
●
●
–
●
●
–
–
NV250-HEW
125–225
Adjustable
40
3 4
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
50/13
50/13
100/25
12,000
4,000
4,000
105 140
165
68
92
1.8 2.3
●
●
–
●
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
Thermalmagnetimagnetimagnetic
Thermal-
Electronic
Thermal-
Electronic
Equipped
Equipped Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
– –
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1.8 2.3
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
NV250-RW
125 150 175
200 225
40
3
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1 •0.5 •1.0)
Button
125/125
125/125
125/125
12,000
4,000
4,000
105
240
68
92
3.5
●
●
–
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
–
●
–
●
● ✽3
● ✽3
–
–
●
●
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Thermalmagnetic
Equipped
2
22

2. Detailed Specifications
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Series
Frame size
C series
400
S series
400
H series
400
Photo
Type name
NV400-CW
NV400-SW
NV400-SEW
NV400-HEW
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (AC V)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
AC440V
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
AC400V
AC230V
Suitability for isolation
a ca c
a
Overall dimensions (mm)
b
b
c
ca
Mass of front-connection type (kg)
Screw terminal
Front Solderless (box) terminal (SL)
Fixed
Installation and
Busbar terminal
connections
Rear
(B)
Plug-in
Rear
(PM)
Rear/front IP20
(PM-IP)
Alarm switch
(AL)
Cassette-type Auxiliary switch
(AX)
accessories Shunt trip
(SHT)
(option)
Undervoltage trip (UVT)
Non-synchronous closing (UVT-N)
Synchronous closing (UVT-S)
Insulation switch
(MG)
Earth-leakage trip alarm
(EAL)
Built-in Test button module
(TBM)
accessories
Pre-alarm-contact output
(PAL)
(option)
Overcurrent trip alarm ✽3
(OAL)
Accessorie’s with Lead-wire terminal block
(SLT)
connection (option) with Flying leads
Enclosure
Dustproof
(S)
( I )
Waterproof
(W)
Electrical operation device
(MD)
Mechanical interlock
(MI)
Handle lock device Handle lock
(HL)
(HL-S)
Lock cover
(LC)
External
(V)
accessories External Door mounting
(S)
(option) operating
handle
(R)
Mounted on breaker
(F)
Insulating Between phase
(BA-F)
barrier To ground
(BA-G)
Large
(TC-L)
Small
(TC-S)
Terminal
cover
Transparent
(TTC)
for rear connection
(BTC)
for plug-in
(PTC)
Automatic tripping device
Trip button
CE marking
✽4
✽3
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Note ✽1: In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: ( / )
✽2: Solid state relay output is option. Please specify if order output is necessary. (Standard type is thus SLT equipped.)
✽3: Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
✽4: Specify if for CE marking.
250 300 350 400
250 300 350 400
200~400 adjustable
200~400 adjustable
40
40
40
40
3
3
3 4 3 4
100–440
100–440
100–440
100–440
Multi-voltage type
Multi-voltage type
Multi-voltage type
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 •200 •500
(30) 100 •200 •500
(30) 100 •200 •500
(30) 100 •200 •500
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
100 •200 •500
100 •200 •500
100 •200 •500
100 •200 •500
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
Selectable
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
Button
Button
Button
25/13
42/42(36/36) ✽1
42/42(36/36) ✽1
65/65
36/18
45/45(36/36) ✽1
50/50(36/36) ✽1
70/70
50/25
85/85(65/65) ✽1
85/85(65/65) ✽1
100/100
●
● ● ●
140
140
140 185
140 185
257
257
257
257
103
103
103
103
134
155
155
155
6.1
6.4
7.1 8.9
7.1 8.9
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
● ✽2
● ✽2
–
–
– –
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
–
–
●
●
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
Thermalmagnetimagnetic
Thermal-
Electronic
Electronic
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Rated operational voltage
100 - 440V
200 - 440V
Available voltage range
80~484V
160~484V
23

H series
400
C series
630
S series
630
H series
630
S series
800
H series
800
NV400-REW
NV630-CW
NV630-SW
NV630-SEW
NV630-HEW
NV800-SEW
NV800-HEW
2
200~400 adjustable
40
500 600 630
40
500 600 630
40
300~630 adjustable
40
300~630 adjustable
40
400~800 adjustable
40
400~800 adjustable
40
3
3
3
3 4
3
3
3
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.04
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
–
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
–
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
–
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
–
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
–
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
100–440
Multi-voltage type
100 •200 •500
Selectable
–
100 •200 •500
Selectable
0.45 •1.0 •2.0
Selectable
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
0.1•0.5 •1.0
Button
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
0.1•0.5 •1.0
Button
(0.1•0.5 •1.0)
Button
125/63
125/63
150/75
●
36/18
36/18
50/25
●
42/42
50/50
85/85
●
42/42
50/50
85/85
●
65/65
70/70
100/100
●
42/42
50/50
85/85
●
65/65
70/70
100/100
●
140
140
140
140 185
140
210
210
257
103
155
257
103
155
257
103
155
257
103
155
257
103
155
275
103
155
275
103
155
7.1
6.9
6.9
7.1 8.9
7.1
15.3
15.3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
–
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ✽2
–
–
● ✽2
● ✽2
● ✽2
● ✽2
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
–
–
●
–
–
●
●
●
–
–
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
–
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
–
●
●
●
–
–
–
–
–
–
Electronic
Thermalmagnetimagnetic
Thermal-
Electronic
Electronic
Electronic
Electronic
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
24

2. Detailed Specifications
Motor-Protection Breakers
Frame A 30
50 100 225
Type name MB30-CS
MB30-SW
MB50-CW MB50-SW MB100-SW MB225-SW
200/220V 400/440V
200/220V 400/440V
A
A
kW kW
kW kW
200/220V 400/440V
200/220V 400/440V
200/220V 400/440V
200/220V 400/440V
A
A
A
A
32 7.5 15 32 7.5 15
kW kW
kW kW
kW kW
kW kW
25 5.5 11 25 5.5 11
100 – 55
45 11 22 7.1 1.5 –
225 55 110
16 3.7 7.5 16 3.7 7.5
90 22 45
Rated current In (Amp.)
(12) – 5.5 12 – 5.5 40 – 18.5 5 – 2.2
200 – –
10 2.2 – 10 2.2 –
71 18.5 37
Rated motor capacity: kW
(8) – 3.7 8 – 3.7
32 7.5 15 4 0.75 1.5 63 15 30
175 45 90
7.1 1.5 – 7.1 1.5 – 25 5.5 11 2.5 0.4 – 45 11 22 150 37 75
Reference ambient temperature 40°C (5) – 2.2 5 – 2.2
4 0.75 1.5 4 0.75 1.5
16 3.7 7.5 2 – 0.75 (40) – 19 125 30 –
(45°C for marine applications)
2.5 0.4 – 2.5 0.4 –
32 7.5 15
12 – 5.5 1.4 0.2 –
(2) – 0.75 2 – 0.75
(25) 5.5 11
1.4 0.2 – 1.4 0.2 –
10 2.2 – 1.2 – 0.4
(16) 3.7 7.5
(1.2) – 0.4 1.2 – 0.4
(0.8) – – 0.8 – –
8 – 3.7 0.8 – – (12.5) – 5.5
Number of poles
2 (for single phase) 3
3
3 3 3 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
500
500
500 500 500 500
440V 1.5/1.5 (415V)
2.5/1
2.5/1 7.5/4 25/13
25/13
lEC 60947-2
(lcu/lcs)
AC 400V 1.5/1.5 (380V)
5/2
5/2 7.5/4 30/15
30/15
230V 2.5/2 (240V)
7.5/4
7.5/4 15/8 50/25 50/25
a ca c
a 45 67.5
75
75 75 90 105
b 96
130
130 130 130 165
b
c 52
68
68 68 68 68
ca 67
90
90 90 90 92
Mass of front-connection type (kg) 0.25 0.35
0.55
0.55 0.55 0.95 1.5
Rated shortcircuit
breaking
capacities (kA)
Overall
dimensions
(mm)
Connection
method
Front connection
(F)
● Crimp contact
● Crimp contact
● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact ● Crimp contact
Rear connection (B) ● Round stud (assembled in) ● Round stud ● Round stud ● Round stud ● Flat stud ● Flat stud
Plug-in
(PM)
–
●
● ● ● ●
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.
25

2. Detailed Specifications
UL Listed Products
Frame A
Type name
100 225 50 100 150 250
NF100-CWU NF225-CWU NF50-SWU NF100-SWU NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW
400
NF-SKW
600
NF-SLW
Photo
2
Rated current In (Amp.)
at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
50 60 75
100
125 150 175
200 225
(3) 5 10 15
20 30 40 50
15 20 30
40 50 60
75 100
15 20 30 40 50
60 70 80 90 100
110 125 150
(125) (150)
175 200
225 250
125 150 175
200 225 250
250 300
350 400
500 600
Number of poles
2 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3
3
3
Rated voltage (V AC) 240 240 240 480Y/277 600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
600Y/347
600Y/347
600Y/347V – – – – 14 14 18
20
20
Rated short-circuit breaking capacities (kA)
UL 489
JIS C 8201-2
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
480V – – – – 35 35 50
480Y/277V – – – 22 35 35 50
240V 10 35 14 35 65 65 100
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600 600 600 690 690 690 690
690V – – – 8/4 8/8 8/8 15/15
500V 7.5/4 10/5 7.5/4 18/9 30/30 30/30 36/36
440V 10/5 15/8 7.5/4 25/13 36/36 36/36 50/50
AC 415V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50
400V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50
380V 10/5 18/9 7.5/4 30/15 36/36 36/36 50/50
35
–
65
690
10/10 (5/5) (✽5)
30/30 (25/25) (✽5)
42/42 (36/36) (✽5)
45/45 (36/36) (✽5)
45/45 (36/36) (✽5)
50/50 (42/42) (✽5)
35
–
85
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
45/45
50/50
230V 30/15 35/18 15/8 50/25 85/85 85/85 100/100
85/85 (65/65) (✽5)
85/85
DC 250V ✽3 7.5/4 10/5 – 15/8 20/20 20/20 20/20
–
–
Compatible to AC/DC ✽1 ● ● – ● ● ● ●
–
–
Suitability for isolation
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
Reverse connection
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
Overall
dimensions
(mm)
a
b
ca c
a 60 90 105 50 75 60 90 105 105 105
b 150 165 150 150 185 185 185
c 68 68 68 68 86 86 86
140
257
103
210
275
103
ca 90 92 90 90 110 110 110
155
155
Mass of front-connection type (kg)
0.7 0.95
1.5
0.45
0.6 0.7 0.95 2.0 2.0 2.0
5.7
9.6
Connection
method
Accessories ✽2
(option)
Front
connection
Screw terminal
Solderless
terminal (box)
Busbar terminal
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
Under-voltage trip
Vertical lead-wire terminal unit
Mechanical interlock
(F) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(SL) ● – – ● ● ● ●
●
●
(BAR) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(AL) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
(AX) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
(SHT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
(UVT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
(SLT) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
(MI) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
●
–
–
External accessories ✽2
(option)
Handle lock device
Operating handle
Insulating barrier
Terminal Large
cover
Small
(HL) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
F ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
V – ● ● – ● – ● ● ● ●
(IB) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(TC-L) ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
(TC-S) – – ✽4 – – – – –
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
●
●
●
●
●
●
–
IEC 35mm rail fixture
– – Supplied standardly – – – –
–
–
Automatic tripping device
Thermalmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
Hydraulicmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
adjustable magnetic
Thermal-
adjustable
Thermalmagnetic
Thermalmagnetic
adjustable
Trip button
Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped Equipped
Equipped
Equipped
TÜV type approval
●
●
● ● ● ● ●
●
●
Notes: ✽1 The trip action characteristics differ between AC and DC for products that are compatible to both AC and DC.
✽2 Specifications for products with a CE mark differ from those for general-purpose products. Details will
be available upon request.
✽3 Use two poles among the three poles in the case of three-pole products. In addition, wiring as shown to the
right allows the models of NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU and NF225-CWU to be used for up to 400 V DC and
the models of NF-SFW, NF-SJW, and NF-HJW to be used for up to 500 V DC.
✽4 The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger protection) structure.
✽5 In case of solderless terminal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/).
Remark: The products of which rated current is parenthesized will be produced when an order is placed.
The operating characteristics of breakers are different between AC and DC (JIS and IEC only).
Line
3-pole
Load
26

2. Detailed Specifications
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Type
BH
BH-P
Frame (A)
70
100
100
70
100
100
Photo
Number
of poles
1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated current (A)
a t ambient temperature 40° C
70 70,100
70,100
70
70,100
70,100
Rated voltage (V)
AC
230/400
DC
125
230/400
125
Breaking capacity
(kA) sym.
IEC 60898
AC230/400V
AC400V
3
—
—
3
3
—
—
3
— DC125V
1
1
Type of instantaneous operation
Type C (5 In

Type
BH-S M3
BH-S M6
Photo
2
Number
of poles
1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 40°C
5,10,15,20,(25),
30,40,50,60
10,15,20,(25),
30,40,50,60
15,20,(25),
30,40,50,60
5,10,15,20,(25),
30,40,50,60
10,15,20,(25),
30,40,50,60
15,20,(25),
30,40,50,60
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
230/400
400 400 230/400 400 400
— 125
— — 125
—
Breaking capacity
(kA) sym.
IEC 60898
AC230/400V
AC400V
3
—
— 6
—
3
—
6
—
DC125V
—
1
— —
1
—
Type of instantaneous operation
Types B,C,D ✳2
a 25
50
75
25
50
75
Dimensions
(mm)
a
b
ca
c
b 95
95
c 57.
5
57. 5
ca
76
76
Mass (kg) 0.15
0.32
0.50
0.15
0.32
0.50
Clamp terminal
Connection ✳1
Automatic
tripping device
Optional
accessories
Terminal cover
Mounting plate
Handle lock
Thermal, magnetic
●
●
●
L ock cover
—
A pproved by
—
✳ 1. If required Solderless terminal can be supplied (Line and Load side)
✳ 2. Type B (3 In

2. Detailed Specifications
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Type
BH-PS M3 BH-PS M9
Photo
Number
of poles
1 2 3 1 2 3
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 40°C
10,15,20,
30,40,50,60
10,15,20,
30,40,50,60
15,20,
30,40,50,60
6,10,16,20,(25),
32,40,50,60
10,16,20,(25),
32,40,50,60
10,16,20,(25),
32,40,50,60
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
230/400
400 400 230/400 400 400
— 125
— —
Breaking capacity
(kA) sym.
IEC 60898
AC230/400V
AC400V
3
—
—
3
9
—
—
9
—
DC125V
—
1
—
—
Type of instantaneous operation
Types B,C,D ✳
a 25
50
75
25
50
75
Dimensions
(mm)
a
b
ca
c
b 81.5
c 60.5
81.5
60.5
ca
79
79
Mass (kg) 0.15
0.32
0.50
0.15
0.32
0.50
Plug-in (line)
Clam p (load)
Connection
Automatic
tripping device
Optional
accessories
Terminal cover
Terminal base
Lock cover
Handle lock
Thermal, magnetic
—
●
—
●
A pproved by
— LR
✳ Type B (3 In

MCB BH-D6 (IEC 60898) BH-DN (IEC 60898)
Photo
2
Number
of poles
1 2 3
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
6,10,13,16,20,25,
32,40,50,63
6,10,13,16,20,25,
32,40,50,63
6,10,13,16,20,25,
32,40,50,63
4 (3+N) 2 (1+N)
610,13,16,20,25,
, 6,10,13,16,20
32,40,50,63
25,32,40
2 (1+N)
6,10,16,20
Rated
voltage (VAC)
230/400
400
400
400
Breaking
capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898)
6
Tripping
characteristics
Dimensions
(mm)
a
b
ca
c
Type B, C, D ✳
a 18 36
54
b 87
c 44
ca
70
Mass (kg) 0.
15
0.30
0.45
Connection
Automatic
tripping device
, Type D (10In , 20In)
Solderless
Thermal,magneti c
Optional accessories Insulating barrier — 1 pc
2 pcs
RCCB BV-D (IEC 61008)
72
0.6
3 pcs
RCBO
230
Type B, C ✳
36
0.30
230
4.5
Type C
18
88
44
70
0.12
1 pc —
BV-DN (IEC 61009)
Photo
Photo
Number
of poles
a
b
ca
c
2(1+N)
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
25, 40, 63
Rated voltage (VAC )
230 230/400
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
30, 300
Max. operating time (s) at 5I∆ 0.04
Pulsating current sensitivity
Rated conditional short-circuit current (kA)
Type AC
6
Dimensions
(mm)
a 36
b 85
c 44
ca
70
Mass (kg) 0.2
C onnection
solderless
4(3+N)
72
0.35
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time (s) at5I∆n
Pulsating current sensitivity
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC61009)
Tripping characteristics
DImension
(mm)
Mass (kg)
Connection
Automatic tripping device
Option
a
b
ca
c
a
b
c
ca
2 (1+N)
6,10,16,20,25,32
230
30,100,300
0.04
Type AC
4.5
Type C ✳
36
88
44
70
0.19
Solderless
Thermal,magnetic
Over voltage release (280V±5%)
Isolating switch KB-D (IEC 60947-3)
Photo
Number
of poles
1 2 3
Utilization category
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
a
b
ca
c
32, 63, 80
Rated
voltage (VAC)
230 400
Short time withstand current (A)
20 ✕ In, 1s
Short-circuit making capacity (A)
20 ✕ In
Dimensions
(mm)
a 18
36
54
b 87
c 44
ca
70
Mass (kg) 0.09 0.18 0.27
Connection
Optional accessories
Insulating barrier
AC22A class
Solderless
— 1 pc
2 pcs
4 (3+N)
72
0.36
3 pcs
30

2. Detailed Specifications
ELRs and ZCTs
Earth-Leakage relays
Type
Model name of ZCT combined
(Note 5)
Hole diameter mm
15
30
40
60
80
100
Electrical self-hold type
NV-ZBA
ZT15B
ZT30B
ZT40B
–
–
–
–
–
–
ZT60B
ZT80B
ZT100B
Mechanical self-hold type
NV-ZSA
ZT15B
ZT30B
ZT40B
–
–
–
Interchangeable leakage relay (Note 1)
–
–
–
ZT60B
ZT80B
ZT100B
Harmonic surge ready
Electrical self-hold type
NV-ZHA
ZT15B
ZT30B
ZT40B
ZT60B
ZT80B
ZT100B
Harmonic surge ready
Mechanical self-hold type
NV-ZLA
ZT15B
ZT30B
ZT40B
ZT60B
ZT80B
ZT100B
Photo
Control voltage AC V
JIS
UL/JIS
UL/CE
Built-in contact
High speed
type
Delay
type
Delay type
JIS
UL/JIS (Note 2)
UL/CE (Note 3)
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s
Rated sensitivity current mA
Operating time s (Note 4)
Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s (Note 4)
Inertial non-operating time s or longer than s
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s at5I∆n
Rated sensitivity current mA
Max. operating time s at2I∆n (Note 4)
Inertial non-operating time s at2I∆n
Earth-leakage indication
Resetting method
Configuration
Continuous current capacity A
Contact capacity A
Connection
Front
Rear
Standard attachment (Front connection)
Mass kg
Relay
External
Terminal cover
accessories Mounting hook for IEC 35mm rail (DIN rail) Fixture
Conforming standard
High
speed
type
High speed
• Delay
type
High
speed
type
Phase line type
Max. consumption VA
US UL standard (UR certified)
Canada CSA standard
European CE marking
120VAC
240VAC
24VDC
120 • 240 selectable
30
100 • 200 • 500
selectable
–
cosφ=1
5
5
5
100 • 200 • 500
selectable
0.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
–
–
Electric type (LED)
Push button or control power
switch off
1c
5
Clamp terminal
–
0.3
(TC-ZBA)
(DIN-ZBA)
–
–
–
cosφ=0.4
L/R=0.007
2
2
2
120VAC
240VAC
415VAC
30VDC
100VDC
200VDC
120 • 240 selectable
240 • 415 selectable
30
100 • 200 • 500
selectable
–
cosφ=1
5
3
2
4
0.4
0.2
3φ4W, 3φ3W, 1φ3W, 1φ2W
100 • 200 • 500
selectable
0.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
(200 • 500 • 1000 selectable)
0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6 selectable
0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
–
–
Mechanical type (button)
Push button
(conbined with earth-leakage
indicator)
1a1c
5
cosφ=0.4
L/R=0.007
3
2
1
3
0.4
0.2
Clamp terminal
Clamp terminal
Mounting screw
0.4
(TC-ZSA)
–
3
Note (1) Interchargeable leakage relay can be freely combined with relay and our ZCT. However, 30mA sensitivity product
(excluding NV-ZHA/ZLA) can be combined with only ZT15B, ZT30B and ZT40B.
(2) Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and JIS together. For voltage indication in
JIS, 100-200V changeover for 120-240V changeover, 200-415V changeover for 240-440V changeover, 460V for
480V are described together. When ordering, specify "UL/JIS".
(3) Indicates control voltage of UL. These are products indicating UL, CSA and CE together. For voltage indication in
CE, 120-230V changeover for 120-240V changeover, 230-440V changeover for 240-440V selectable are described
together. When ordering, specify "UL/CE".
(4) When the operating time are 0.3 and 0.45 seconds, 0.8 and 1.0 seconds, and 1.6 seconds, the relay operates
between 0.15 and 0.45, between 0.6 and 1.0 seconds and between 1.2 and 2.0 seconds respectively.
(5) Can be combined with interchangeable ZCT with primary conductor. Refer to the next page for detail.
(6) It's not UL-certified.
–
–
–
–
120 • 240 selectable
240 • 440 selectable
–
30 50
0.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
– • 0.1 • 0.5
30 • 50 • 100 selectable
0.04
100 • 300 • 500 selectable
300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
0.45 • 1.0 selectable
0.1 • 0.5
Electric type (LED)
Push button or control power
switch off
1a1c
5
cosφ=1
cosφ=0.4
120VAC
240VAC
24VDC
5
5
5
L/R=0.007
2
2
2
Use auxiliary relay for AC415V contact.
Clamp terminal
Clamp terminal
0.4
(TC-ZSA)(Note 6)
–
UL1053
Recognized component
(File No.E196562)
LR103083(Certified No.)
Declaration for conformity
IEC60947-2 AnnexB
EN60947-2 AnnexB
Control voltage
120V
240V
415V
Control voltage
120V
240V
440V
480V
–
120 • 240 selectable
240 • 440 selectable
480
120VAC
240VAC
480VAC
30VDC
Available voltage range
80~126V
160~252V
320~484V
Available voltage range
80~132V
160~264V
304~484V
368~528V
–
30 50
0.1
100 • 200 • 500 selectable
0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0 selectable
– • 0.1 • 0.5
30 • 50 • 100 selectable
0.04
100 • 300 • 500 selectable
300 • 500 • 1000 selectable
0.45 • 1.0 selectable
0.1 • 0.5
Mechanical type (button)
Push button
(conbined with earthleakage
indicator)
1a1c
5
cosφ=1
5
3
1
3
Clamp terminal
Clamp terminal
cosφ=0.4
L/R=0.007
3
2
1
3
0.4
(TC-ZSA)(Note 6)
–
UL1053
Recognized component
(File No.E196562)
LR103083(Certified No.)
Declaration for conformity
IEC60947-2 AnnexB
EN60947-2 AnnexB
Remark (1) Relays with rate shown in the ( ) in the space for rate
are manufactured by your order.
(2) CE marking is for self-statement for the purpose of
interrupting NF when ground-fault occurs by combining
with our NF with CE marking (voltage tripping device).
(3) NV-ZBA/ZSA
(4) NV-ZHA/ZLA
Example of applicable circuit voltage
100 • 110V • 120V
200 • 220 • 240V
400 • 415 • 440V
Example of applicable circuit voltage
100 • 110 • 120V
200 • 220 • 230 • 240V
380 • 400 • 415 • 440V
460 • 480V
31

Interchangeable ZCT
Type
ZT15B
ZT30B
Aperture diameter (mm)
15
30
40
60
80
100
Mass (kg) 0.
2
0.
4
0.
6
2.
0
2.
6
3. 3
Rated short time current
50 (peak value)
Dimensions
(mm)
a 48
68
85
140
160
185
b 52
52
52
90
90
90
c 70
90
100
150
169
190
d
a
e
b
c
ZT40B
ZT60B
ZT80B
ZT100B
d 25
50
50
100
100
100
e 40
40
40
70
70
70
2
ZCT aperture diameter and permissible wire size
ZCT aperture diameter (mm)
15
30
40
60
80
100
2
Max.
permissible 600V rated wire size in mm (current in amperes )
1ø2w
P olyvinyl chloride insulated wire
14
(88)
60
(217)
150
(395)
325
(650)
600
(992)
800 (1185)
1ø3w
3ø3w
C ross-linked polyethylene insulated cable
2 (33)
38
(190)
60
(260)
250
(655)
400
(870)
600 (1140)
P olyvinyl-chloride insulated wire
8 (61)
38
(162)
100
(298)
250
(556)
500
(842)
725 (1095)
C ross-linked polyethylene insulated cable
2 (33)
22
(135)
60
(260)
200
(560)
325
(760)
600 (1140)
3ø4w
P olyvinyl-chloride insulated wire
8 (61)
38
(162)
100
(298)
150
(395)
325
(650)
600 (992)
C ross-linked polyethylene insulated cable
— 14
(105)
38
(190)
100
(365)
250
(655)
400 (870)
Interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors
Type
ZTA600A
ZTA1200A
Number
of poles
3
ZTA2000A
Rated
voltage (VAC)
600
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value )
a
a 227
227
360
b 256
298
250
ba
366
444
594
c
c 42
78
79
ca
ca
125
176
214
b
ba
ELRs with a ZCT with primary conductors
Frame (A)
600
1200
2000
3200
Type
ZBA
ZSA
ZHA
ZLA
Interchangeable ELR and interchangeable ZCTs with primary conductors
Number
of poles
3
NV-ZBA3200
NV-ZSA3200
NV-ZHA3200
NV-ZLA3200
Rated
voltage (VAC)
600
Rated short time current (kA) 100 (peak value )
a
a 227
227
360
490
b 256
298
250
320
ba
366
444
594
868
c
c 42
78
79
111
ca
ca
125
176
214
290
Mass (kg) 6.
5
11
27
54
b
ba
High-speed type
C ontrol voltage (VAC)
R ated current sensitivity (mA)
M ax. operating time (s)
Inertial non-operating time (s)
ZBA 120
• 240✳ 100
• 200
• 500✳
ZSA
120 • 240✳,
240 • 415✳
100
• 200
• 500✳
0 .1
—
ZBA
120 • 240✳
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6✳ 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
Specification of
ELRs
Time-delay type
⎛High-speed • ⎞
⎝Time-delay type⎠
ZSA
ZHA
120 • 240✳
240 • 415✳
120 • 240✳
240 • 440✳ 100 • 300 • 500✳
300 • 500 • 1000✳
100 • 200 • 500✳
(200 • 500 • 1000✳)
0.3 • 0.8 • 1.6✳ 0.1 • 0.5 • 1.1
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0✳ – • 0.1 • 0.5
0.45 • 1.0✳ (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
ZLA
120 • 240✳
240 • 440✳
480
100 • 200 • 500✳ 0.1 • 0.45 • 1.0✳ – • 0.1 • 0.5
100 • 300 • 500✳
300 • 500 • 1000✳
0.45 • 1.0✳ (at 2l∆n) 0.1 • 0.5 (at 2l∆n)
✳ Selectable .
32

2. Detailed Specifications
Circuit Protectors
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS TYPE CP
Frame (A) 30
Type CP30-BA CP-S
Photo
33
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Rated current (A)
Rated short-circuit
capacity (kA)
AC-DC common use
Reverse connection
Rated short time current
(for switch only type)
Mass (kg)
Accessories
Connection
UL1077
CSA C22.2 No.235 ✳ 11
IEC 60934
EN 60934
GB 17701 ✳ 11
(Icn)
JIS C 4610
(Icn)
EN 60947-2
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
Rated ambient temperature (°C)
Operating characteristics
Mode of tripping
Method of operation
Trip-free behaviour
Inertial delay (ID)
Alarm switch (AL)
Auxiliary switch (AX)
Shunt trip (SHT)
Terminal cover (TC)
Flushpanel mounting brackets (FP)
Back facing wiring termnal (BT)
Lock cover (LC)
Accessory terminal cover (TC)
Main body
Alarm switch / Auxiliary switch
AC (V)
Rated voltage (V)
DC (V)
AC
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
DC
1 2
3
1 2 3
250
250
2.5 2.5
0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 30
250
65 125
2.5kA at 250V
2.5kA at 65V
2.5kA at 125V
250
2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V –
● – ✳ 1
●
0.08 0.16
● (Medium, Slow type: AC only)
Main body mounting method
Srface, IEC rail mounting
Flush panel mounting (option)
International standard UL(cURus), CCC ✳ 5
0.05 0.1 0.25 0.3 0.5 0.75 1 2 2.5 3 5 7 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
250 –
65 –
1.5kA at 250V –
1kA at 65V –
250
1kA at 60V
✳ 1. The 3P products are use for AC only.
✳ 2. Contact us for operating characteristics other than those mentioned above.
✳ 3. In the pole with a shunt tripping apparatus, an over-current tripping element becomes nothing. (Switched type shunt tripping type)
✳ 4. In the case of back wiring terminals, specify if it will be used with ratings 20A or less, or 30A.
✳ 5. UL(cURus), CCC, and CE Marking are displayed on standard products.
✳ 6. It is recognition of UL(cURus), CCC, and TUV.
✳ 7. In case of DC use, only DC65V is available.
✳ 8. Specify if for DC use when ordering.
✳ 9. Specify when ordering. (In case of CP-S UL, type name is CP-SU.)
✳ 10. Connection is male tub terminal only.
✳ 11. CP30-BA only.
Remark (1) The non-standard conditions products are also made by your order.
(Low temperature, Moisture-fungus treatment of the 1st kind, Moisture-fungus treatment of the 2nd kind, Corrosion resistive.)
(2) Although buzzing sound may be made if an instantaneous type becomes 80% or more of rated current when it is used by AC, there is no problem on a performance.
Therefore, when used in a quiet environment, please select after taking this point into consideration.
(3) Please use it in a circumference environment without temperature, humidity, dust, corrosive gas, vibration, and impact.
And please do not use it in a circuit with inrush current, and a circuit with harmonics. It may become unnecessary action or trouble.
1kA at 60V
Trip-free (IEC60934)
0.23
0.06 0.12 0.18
● (Medium, Slow, Fast type:AC only)
● (1c) ✳ 7
● (1c)
● (for parallel and relay type:AC only)
–
–
–
● –
–
Male tub terminal 6.3mm (#250)
[Screw terminal M4 (series type only)]
Male tub terminal 2.8mm (#110)
Panel mounting
UL(UR) ✳ 9, 10 –
⎛ Operating characteris is ⎞
Medium type (M) only.
EN60934 : TUV approval
⎜
⎟
CE Marking EN60934 : TUV approval ✳ 10 The rated current, 0.3A,
EN60947-2 : Self-declaration ✳ 5
⎜ 2A, 3A and 7A are not ⎟
⎝ applied.
⎠
250
2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V –
250
2.5kA at 230V
2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V –
250
2.5/2.5kA at 230V
–
40 (T40)
Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD);
Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) ✳ 2
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO]
Medium type (M), (MD)
Slow type (S), (SD) : hydraulic-magnetic [HM]
Fast type (F)
● (1c)
● (1c)
● (for relay type) ✳ 3
● ✳ 6
●
● ✳ 4, 6
–
● ✳ 6
20A or less : Screw terminal M4
30A : Screw termnal M5
Screw terminal M3.5
–
–
S-type (IEC60934)
1kA at 65V
–
–
–
– ✳ 8
25 (T25)
Instantaneous type (I); Medium type (M), (MD);
Slow type (S), (SD); Fast type (F) (FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only [MO]
Medium type (M), (MD)
Slow type (S), (SD)
Fast type (F), (FD)
1.5kA at 230V
2.5kA at 120V
1kA at 120V
(1kA at 60V) ✳ 7
250
1.5kA at 250V
2.5kA at 125V
1kA at 125V
(1kA at 65V) ✳ 7
–
AC250V 50/60Hz 1500A 0.02s
AC125V 50/60Hz 2500A 0.02s
DC65V 1000A 0.02s
DC125V 1000A 0.02s
1kA at 65V
: hydraulic-magnetic [HM]

3. Special Purpose Breakers
Mag Only, DC-Use And DSN-Type
Mag Only (Instantaneous tripping circuit breakers)
NF63-CW/SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW/HW
AC, DC
AC, DC
Fixed
NF160-SW/HW AC, DC
Rated current x10
NF250-CW/SW/HW AC, DC
Adjustable
NF400-CW/SW
NF630-CW/SW
NF125-SGW/HGW
NF160-SGW/HGW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NF800-SEW
NF800-SDW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
NF1250-SDW
NF1600-SDW
AC, DC
AC, DC
AC
DC
AC
AC
DC
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x4
(AC)
High: Rated current x13
Low: Rated current x5.2
(DC)
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x2
High: 8000A
Low: 3200A
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x2
High: Rated current x10
Low: Rated current x2
High: 8000A
Low: 3200A
Remarks: 1. The size, weight, accessories, etc., are all identical to the same-designation C, S
and H series breakers.
2. For more detail, contact your dealer.
2
3
DC-Use MCCBs and DSN-type Switches
Breaking is more difficult with direct currents because
the current value never reaches zero. While ordinary
DC breakers are suitable for low voltages, special
voltage DC breakers are recommended for voltages in
excess of 250VDC. Breakers for 550V are all 4-pole
models.
The size, shape, drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all
identical to the S series of same-designation breakers.
Type
Number of poles
Rated voltage (VDC)
Rated breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Notes: 1: Time constant: 10ms or below.
Type
Number of poles
Rated voltage (VDC)
Interrupting capacity (kA)
Instantaneous trip current (min.)
NF63-SW NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
3
400
3
440
4
550
3
440
4
550
3
440
4
550
3
500
4
600
3
500
4
600
3
500
4
600
3
500
4
600
3
500
4
600
2/1 10/5 20/5 20/5 40/40 40/40 40/40
40/20 40/20
•DC side
These breakers are designed as thyristor-Leonard
system DC-side breakers. They protect the thyristor
from short circuiting when there is a power or
Wiring diagram for DC-usage.
Wiring diagram for DC use.
Note: The tripping characteristics will change if the wiring differs from the one
shown here.
communication failure. (Mag-Only breakers can also
be used for this role.) Use these breakers in
combination with fast fuses for even greater protection.
NF125-SW NF160-SW NF250-SW NF400-SW NF630-SW NF800-SDW NF1250-SDW NF1600-SDW
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
2
250
3
440
15 10 15 20 15 20
20
20
20
20
20
3 times rated current 3 times rated current 3 times rated current 900A
1000A
1400A
2500A
3200A
•DSN-type switches
These are standard MCCBs without the automatic
tripping element. The tripping capacity is about six
times the rated current.
The appearance, size, drilling plan and available
accessories are all identical to similar type standard S
and C series MCCBs.
Type
DSN30-CS
DSN63-CW DSN125-CW DSN250-CW DSN400-CW
DSN630-CW
DSN800-CW
Rated
current (A)
30
63 125 250
400
630
800
Number
of poles
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
R ated voltage (AC/DC)
460/
—
500/250
500/250
500/250
600/250
600/250
600/250
Max. switching current (AC/DC) 180/—
378/155 750/310
1500/625
2400/1000
3780/1575
4800/2000
Type
Rated current (A)
Number of poles
Rated voltage (AC/DC)
Max. switching current (AC/DC)
DSN32-SW DSN50-SS DSN63-SW DSN125-SW DSN125-SGW DSN160-SGW DSN250-SW DSN250-SGW DSN400-SW DSN630-SW DSN800-SW DSN1000-SW DSN1250-SW DSN1600-SW
32 50 63 125 125 160 250 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
2 3 1 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
500/250 265/125 500/250 690/250 690/300 690/300 500/250 690/300 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250 690/250
192/80 300/125 378/155 750/310 750/315 960/400 1500/625 1500/625 2400/1000 3780/1575 4800/2000 6000/2500 7500/3125 9600/4000
34

3. Special Purpose Breakers
400Hz-Use, Instantaneous And Generator Protection
400Hz-Use MCCBs
Standard MCCBs cannot be used in 400Hz circuit.
When standard MCCBs are used in the high frequency
circuit (eq. 400Hz), the instantaneous chracteristic will
be shifted higher. “400Hz use MCCBs” are
reccomended to use in 400Hz circuit.
•Specifications
The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,
drilling plan, accessories, etc., are all identical to the
standard S and H series of same-designation breakers.
Type
Rated current (A)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage (V)
Rated breaking capacity
(kA)
IEC60947-2 (Icu / Ics)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
Note *1. Instantaneous trip current : Rated current x 14 (Fix)
NF125-SW NF125-HW NF250-SW NF250-HW NF400-SW NF400-SEW NF630-SW *1 NF630-SEW NF800-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
16, 20, 32,
40, 50, 63,
80, 100
16, 20, 32,
40, 50, 63,
80, 100
125, 150
175, 200
125, 150
175, 200
225, 250
300, 350
200~350
adjustable
400, 500
300~500
adjustable
400~600
adjustable
600~800
adjustable
800~1200
adjustable
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
690
8/4
18/9
25/13
30/15
50/25
10/5
30/15
50/25
50/25
100/50
–
15/8
25/13
30/15
50/25
5/3
30/8
50/13
50/13
100/25
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
Low-Instantaneous MCCBs
•Low-Inst. MCCBs for Discrimination
When a power fuse (PF) is used for high-voltage
proection, make sure that the MCCB on the secondary
side is compatible.
Type
NF125-CW NF125-SW NF250-CW NF250-SW NF400-CW
Number
of poles
2 3 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3
Rated current (A)
50, 63, 80,
100, 125
16, 20, 32, 40
50, 63, 80, 100,125
125, 150, 175
200, 225, 250
125, 150, 175
200, 225, 250
250, 300
350, 400
•Specifications
PF
Tr1
MCCB 1
Time
MCCB
operating
characteristic
curve
Low-inst.
MCCBs
PF short-time
tolerance capacity
Instantaneous trip
(% of rated
current)
600
● ● ● ● ●
400
— — ● ● ●
MCCB 2
Current
Fig. 4.12 Low-inst. MCCB characteristics
Remarks: 1. Ensure compatibility with motor, etc., before use to prevent accidental tripping at start up.
2. Specify rated current and tripping characteristic.
3. There are no short time delay characteristics.
The appearance, size, rated interrupting capacity,
accessories, etc., are all identical to the standard
instantaneous trip breakers of the same designation.
Generator-Protection MCCBs
These breakers are designed for generator protection.
•Specifications
Type
NF125-SGW
NF125-HGW NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
Number
of poles
3 3 3 3
Rated current (A)
16-32
32-63
63-100
75-125
adjustable
16-32
32-63
63-100
75-125
adjustable
125~250
adjustable
125~250
adjustable
Instantaneous
trip (% of rated current)
300
✳1
Operating time at 150% of rated current (s)
Rated insulation voltage (V)
18~28
690
✳1
AC690V
8/8
20/20
8/8
20/20
Rated breaking
capacity
(kA)
IEC60947-2
(Icu / Ics)
AC500V
AC440V
AC400V
30/30
36/36
36/36
50/50
65/65
75/75
30/30
36/36
36/36
50/50
65/65
75/75
AC230V
85/85
100/100
85/85
100/100
✳1: These MCCBs operating characteristic must be adjusted as follows.
STD ≤ 3 (Is setting)
LTD: minimum setting (TL = 12s setting)
35

3. Special Purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
Measuring Display Unit (MDU)
• Energy management becomes possible by measurement and display of load
current, line voltage, electric power, electric energy, harmonic current (3rd, 5th,
7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, 15th, 17th, 19th, and total) and power factor.
• MDU with pulse output option can output pulse of electric energy.
MDU with CC-Link option can transfer measured data to open network CC-Link.
•
When a circuit breaker outputs an alarm, LED on MDU turns on.
PAL : pre-alarm
OVER : over current
• When the circuit breaker has tripped, fault cause and fault current stored in
•
EEPROM. It makes investigation of cause and restoration of power line possible.
The max. demand value of load current, line voltage, total harmonic current,
electric power and electric energy (hourly value), are stored in EEPROM.
And MDU with CC-Link option can store the outbreak time of these. It makes easy
finding of peak time of power consumption possible.
NF400-SEP with MDU
3
Application type
Type
Frame size
Rated current In (Amp.)
Load current (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value)
Line voltage (Present value, maximum value)
Harmonic current (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value)
Electric power (Present value, demand value, maximum demand value)
Electric energy, electric energy (hourly value),
maximum electric energy (hourly value)
Measured
Power factor (Present value)
and
Rated measuring current
displayed Accuracy of measuring current (Limit deviation tolerance)
value
Rated measuring voltage
Accuracy of measuring voltage (Limit deviation tolerance)
Maximum measuring current (Note1.)
Maximum measuring harmonic current (Note1.)
Maximum measuring voltage (Note1.)
Measurement range of power factor
Fault current/cause (Note1.) (Note2.)
Overload and short-circuit (Note 3.)
Alarm LED indication
Phasing line
Electric energy accumulated pulse output (option) (Note3.)
CC-Link transmission (option) (Note3.) (Note4.)
Control power (Allowable voltage range 85~110%)
Breaker mounting
MDU installation
Panel mounting (Note7.)
Pre-alarm (PAL) (Power supply AC/DC100-240V required)
Alarm contact output (option)
Trip indicator (TI) (Power supply AC/DC100-240V required)
NF250-SW
with MDU
250
125, 150, 175,
200, 225, 250
250A
±6.25A
500A
250A
The fault cause: “AL” is
displayed. The fault current: It
displays it up to 10 times the
rated current.
(“AL switch for the MDU
transmission” (option) is
necessary. )
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker
NF400-SEP
NF400-HEP
with MDU
400
200-400
adjustable
400A
±10A
AC440V
±11V
800A
400A
AC690V
Lead 0.0~100.0~0.0 Lag(%),
The value of power factor is reference value if less than 50%.
PAL, OVER
3φ3W, 1φ3W (3 poles breaker), 3φ4W (4 poles breaker)
AC/DC100-240V 12VA (Note5.)
PAL
NF630-SEP
NF630-HEP
with MDU
630
300-630
adjustable
630A
±15.76A
1260A
630A
NF800-SEP
NF800-HEP
with MDU
800
400-800
adjustable
800A
±20A
The fault cause: Overload “L” and short-circuit “SI” are
displayed.
The fault current: It displays it up to 16 times the
maximum rated current.
– PAL, OAL
1600A
800A
Note1. When the input becomes more than the measurement maximum value, the current, the voltage, the harmonic current, and the fault current display the measurement maximum value. It does
the blinking display.
(However, when the fault occurs, the fault cause of and the fault current measurement value do the blinking display though it is less than measurement maximum value.)
When electric power becomes more than the measurement maximum value of or either the current or the voltage becomes more than its measurement maximum value, the electric power
does the blinking display.
Note2. Either of overload (L) or short-circuit (SI) is displayed. It doesn’t display it at the same time.
Note3. Pulse output option and CC-Link option cannot be attached at the same time.
Note4. When the breaker mounting type of MDU is installed, the version of CC-Link is “Ver.1.10”.
When the panel mounting type of MDU is installed, the version of CC-Link cable (FANC-SB) used for the terminal stand from the surface of MDU to the other side is “CC-Link Ver.1.00”.
Note5. When control power supplied to MDU, then rushed current transitionally, max. 2Apeak, 1ms (at 240VAC).
Note6. The module (terminal) is attached to the right side of the breaker.
Pre-alarm (PAL) output function can set “Self-holding” or “Auto reset”.
For function of alarm contact output (PAL, OAL), MDU and the circuit breaker must be connected with the mutuality and the control power must be supplied to MDU and alarm contact
output module.
Note7. In the case of panel mounting, the part set (the panel holder plate, the screws, the nuts and the MDU connection cable) is packed. And, the MDU connection cable is 2m (standard). (MDU
connection cable can be specified by 0.5m, 3m, and as many as 5m.)
36

3. Special Purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
Measuring Display Unit
i Numerical
display LED
(6digit)
!4Alarm
display
LED
o Mode
selection
LED
!0 Phase
selection
LED
!1 Measured
value selection
LED
MODE PHASE VALUE FUNCTION
!2 Function
selection
LED
!3 Unit display
LED
(Characters light up.)
u
y
active LED
(UP) switch
Displayed items and functions are changed by
pushing q~r switch.
Selected item is shown by LED (below o - !2).
(Ex. Phase selection 1➞2➞3➞N➞1…)
▲/▼ switchy is active when adjustment or
reset operation is required.
(▲▼ active LEDu is turned on)
There may be functions which cannot be
operated depending upon the specifications.
The invalid function is skipped.
y
(DOWN) switch
q Mode
selection
switch
w Phase
selection
switch
e Measure value
selection switch
r Function
selection
switch
t ENTER
switch
Installed on the circuit
breaker
Installed on the panel
37

NF250-SW with MDU
Front-Connection
Mounting hole
100
70
22
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole
100
105
35
Insulating barrier
(removable)
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
4
100
92
72
68
24
Breaker
Breaker
22
165
144
50
102
165
144
50
102
φ8.5
126
126
100
Trip
button
90
105
3-pole
100
Trip
button
MDU
terminal
cover
90
105
140
4-pole
37
75
Neutral
pole
MDU
MDU
terminal
cover
30
φ8.5
45
61
φ4.5
10
23 max.
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection
35
3-pole
35 35
4-pole
Drilling plan
M4✕0.7 taps
or φ5
3
Rear-Connection
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearance on each
side of handle.
4
100
92
72
68
Mounting plate
t max. 3.2
Stud can be
rotated 90°
Insulating
4-pole
tube
3-pole
MDU
Breaker
105
35
Breaker
(Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
3-pole
4-pole
3-pole
4-pole
Breaker
37
φ8.5
Connection
allowance
22
20
144
8
126
144
R1
26
150
R1
75
52
MDU
30
φ4.5
45
61
71
106
15 15
6
φ9
M8 bolt
70
105
M4✕0.7
breaker
mounting
screw
Insulating
tube
35
70
3-pole
φ24
M4✕0.7 taps
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
35
4-pole
φ24
100
32.5
100
32.5
CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF250-SW with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)
MDU panel mounting
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.
MDU Terminal
M4 screw
Upper
side
Operation/display
side
75
70
12
28.5
Panel
Panel holder plate
Terminal PE screw (M4)
Terminal block
MDU connector
40
M3 nut
Panel
thickness
1~3.2mm
90
75
MDU display
part
R2
86.5
40
72
40
Front panel cutout
Space greater than the value
shown in the figure below
must be secured, and must be
separate 10cm or more from the
distribution line.
For the set
installation
198
4
3
2
1
L2
L1
Control power
1 2 3 4
No transmission
Pulse output 113 114
72
96
85
90
158
Terminal block
M4 screw
8.5
54
58.5
30
M3.5
screw
Terminal
cover
M3 nut
In case of front connection,
keep space between MDU and
conductor or insulation
barrier too.
Control power
L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
No transmission
Pulse output
1 2 3 4 5 6
FG
FG 113 114
38

3. Special Purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
NF250-SW with MDU (CC-Link)
MDU panel mounting
Upper
side
Operation/display
side
43.1
12
M3 screw
Terminal
PE screw(M4)
104.5
28.5
Terminal
block
55
38
75
70
58.5
23
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.
Panel
Panel holder
plate
MDU
connector
M3
screw
Terminal
cover
48
67.5
M3 screw
M3 nut
85
90
96
M3 nut
90
Panel
thickness
1~3.2mm
75
MDU display
part
R2
86.5
40
72
76
Front panel cutout
Space greater than the value
shown in the figure below
must be secured, and must be
separate 10cm or more from the
distribution line.
For the set
installation
218
158
In case of front connection,
keep space between MDU and
conductor or insulation
barrier too.
MDU Terminal
Terminal block
Control power
Figure of the breaker mounting
is removed the terminal cover.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L2
L1
1 2 3 4
SLD DG DB DA
5 6 7 8
SLD DG DB DA
L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
Control power
FG SLD DG DB DA
5
6
39

NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP with MDU
Front-Connection
110
112
51
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole
22
56
28
16
43
Conductor
t max.=8
94.5
44
8
Breaker
Trip
button
39
97
103
102
257
51
φ12.5
47
φ7
194
PE
φ14
M12 bolt
MDU
terminal
cover
58
90
140
Current
indication LED
OVER
PAL
MDU 70%
36
168
185
196
39
Neutral
pole
75
30
5
44
107
131
155
25
12
φ10.5
Conductor t max.=8
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
44 M6 taps 44
or φ7
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
3
3-pole
4-pole
Rear-Connection
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearance on each
side of handle.
Mounting plate
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
MDU
Breaker
Eddy-current
heat-reducing slit
8
(Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
4-pole
Breaker
4-pole
Connection
allowance
20
25 20
26
225
265
M6 taps
or φ7
14
225
194
3-pole
R6
3-pole
R6
113
10
φ13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
87
130.5
M6 breaker
mounting screw
Insulating
tube
44
87
3-pole
φ35
Drilling plan
44
43.5
130.5
4-pole
63 46
138
33
37
(59)
118
37
118
92
Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed.
CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP, NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (No transmission, Pulse output)
MDU panel mounting
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.
MDU Terminal
Figure of the breaker mounting
is removed the terminal cover.
Upper
side
Operation/display
side
M4 screw
M4 screw
12
28.5
Terminal block
40
72
8.5
54
75
70
Panel
Terminal PE screw (M4)
58.5
30
Panel holder plate
MDU connector
96
M3.5
screw
Terminal cover
M3 nut
Panel
thickness
1~3.2mm
90
85
90
M3 nut
75
MDU display
part
R2
86.5
40
72
40
For the set
installation
Front panel cutout
Type
NF400-SEP
NF400-HEP
NF630-SEP
NF800-SEP
NF630-HEP
NF800-HEP
Space greater than the value
shown in the figure below
must be secured, and must be
separate 10cm or more from the
distribution line.
A
244
374
253
263
B
205
205
221
221
383 221
A
B
In case of front connection,
keep space between MDU
and conductor or insulation
barrier too.
4
3
2
1
L2
L1
Control power
1 2 3 4
No transmission
Pulse output 113 114
Terminal block
Control power
No transmission
Pulse output
L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5
6
FG
FG 113 114
40

3. Special Purpose Breakers
MDU Breakers
NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU
Front-Connection
110
32
Trip
button
PE
14
40
51
140
210
3-pole
85
90
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole
Current
indication LED
OVER
PAL
MDU
70%
MDU
terminal
cover
70
35
210
280
50
4-pole
32
102
8
15
Conductor t max. 94.5
600AF t8
800AF t12
87 275 87
Neutral
pole
φ14
M12 bolt
51
75
30
5
97
103
φ14
107
131
155
8
φ8
8
600AF 44
800AF 46
15
600AF 44
800AF 46
Dimension of terminal
directly connected to
conductor
φ8.5
40
22
600AF 24
800AF 26
12
Conductor t max.
600AF t8
800AF t10
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
70
3-pole
Breaker
M6 taps
or φ7
Drilling plan
70
4-pole
243
Rear-Connection
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearance on each
side of handle.
Mounting
plate
Connection
allowance
25
Stud can be
rotated 90°
MDU
M6 taps
or φ7
Breaker
Eddy-current
heat-reducing slit
5
4-pole
(Load side of breaker mounting has given
the space to pass wires to the terminal.)
4-pole
15
10
3-pole
Breaker
3-pole
Breaker
8
40
243
295
12.5
243
R6
R6
13
46
10
113
110
32
φ13
M12 bolt
8
140
M6 breaker
mounting
screw
70
140
φ48
70
70
210
6
(86)
51
46
138
172
51
92
3-pole
4-pole
172
Drilling plan
Note:The drilling plan is different if insulating barriers are installed.
CC-Link ; only MDU panel mounting
NF400-SEP, NF400-HEP, NF630-SEP, NF630-HEP, NF800-SEP, NF800-HEP with MDU (CC-Link)
MDU panel mounting
MDU is connected with circuit breaker via MDU connection cable.
MDU Terminal
Figure of the breaker mounting
is removed the terminal cover.
Upper
side
43.1
Operation/display
side
M3 screw
38
Terminal
PE screw(M4)
104.5
12
28.5
Terminal
block
55
75
70
58.5
23
Panel
Panel holder
plate
MDU
connector
48
M3
screw
67.5
Terminal
cover
M3 screw
M3 nut
85
90
96
M3 nut
Panel
thickness
1~3.2mm
90
75
MDU display
part
R2
86.5
40
72
Space greater than the value
shown in the figure below
must be secured, and must be
separate 10cm or more from the
distribution line.
76
Front panel cutout
Type
NF400-SEP
NF400-HEP
NF630-SEP
NF800-SEP
NF630-HEP
NF800-HEP
For the set
installation
A
263
393
272
282
B
205
205
221
221
402 221
A
B
In case of front connection,
keep space between MDU
and conductor or insulation
barrier too.
Terminal block
Control power
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L2
L1
1 2 3 4
SLD DG DB DA
5 6 7 8
SLD DG DB DA
L1L2 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
FG SLD DG DB DA
5
Control power
6
41

4. Connection Method
1. Connection Types
Table 4-1: Connection Types
Connection Method (Abbreviation) Front connection (F) Solderless terminal
Rear connection (B)
The front connection model will be delivered unless otherwise specified. Notice, however,
that you can convert the front connection model to other types (excluding the plug-in) by
using an appropriate connection component, which is separately available.
Plug-in (PM)
Appearance
2. Connection Accessories
Table 4-2: List of Connection Accessories
✽1
3
Type name
Solderless terminal (SL) Rear studs (B-ST) Plug-in (PM) ✽1
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
NF32-SW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
NF63-SW/HW
NV100-SEP/HEP
NF125-CW/SW
NF125-HW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-CW/SW/HW
NV125-RW
2P
3P
4P
3P
2P
3P
–
SL-1SW4L ✽ 3
SL-1SW4G ✽ 4
SL-1SW3L ✽ 3
SL-1SW3G ✽ 4
ST-05SW2
ST-05SW3
ST-05SW4
ST-1SP3
ST-1SW2
ST-1HW2
ST-1SW3
PM-05SW2
PM-05SW3
PM-05SW4
PM-1SP3
PM-1SW2
PM-1HW2
PM-1SW3
PM-1UW3
4
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW
4P
SL-1SW4L ✽ 3
SL-1SW4G ✽ 4
ST-1SW4
PM-1SW4
NF250-CW/SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW
2P
SL-2SW4L ✽ 5
SL-2SW4G ✽ 6
ST-2SW2
PM-2SW2
NF250-CW/SW/HW, MB225-SW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW/RW/SEW/HEW
NV250-RW
3P
SL-2SW3L ✽ 5
SL-2SW3G ✽ 6
SL-2UW3L ✽ 5
SL-2UW3G ✽ 6
ST-2SW3
ST-2UW3
PM-2SW3
NF250-SW/HW, NF160-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW
NF250-RGW/UGW, NF125-RGW/UGW
NF250-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF125-SGW/HGW
NF250-UGW, NF125-UGW
NF400-CW/SW
NF400-CW/SW/SEW, NV400-CW/SW/SEW
NF400-HEW/REW, NV400-HEW/REW
NF400-SW/SEW, NV400-SEW
NF400-HEW, NV400-HEW
NF630-CW/SW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW
NF630-HEW/REW, NV630-HEW
NF630-SW/SEW, NV630-SEW
NF630-HEW
NF800-SDW
NF800-CEW/SEW, NV800-SEW
NF800-HEW/REW, NV800-HEW
NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
4P
2P
3P
4P
2P
3P
3P
4P
4P
2P
3P
3P
4P
4P
2P
3P
3P
4P
4P
SL-2SW4L ✽ 5
SL-2SW4G ✽ 6
SL-2GSW4
SL-2GSW3
SL-2GSW4
Notes: ✽ 1 You can use the plug-in terminal unit (PM) when the wiring of terminal units is required in advance, and the delivery of both the main body and the components at the same time,
which is normal, is not allowed. Furthermore specify the nonuse of plug-in terminal (PM-N) for the connection of circuit breaker.
✽ 2 If safety device is necessary ,please require.
✽ 3 Connected wire size: 2.5~25mm 2
✽ 4 Connected wire size: 25~70mm 2
Line
Load
✽ 5 Connected wire size: 14~95mm 2
✽ 6 Connected wire size: 70~125mm 2
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
ST-2SW4
ST-2GSW2
ST-2GSW3
ST-2GSW4
ST-4SW2
ST-4SW3
ST-4SW4
ST-6SW2
ST-6SW3
ST-6SW4
ST-8SW2
ST-8SW3
ST-8SW4
PM-2SW4
PM-2GSWIP2 ✽ 2
PM-2GUW2
PM-2GSWIP3 ✽ 2
PM-2GUW3
PM-2GSWIP4 ✽ 2
–
PM-4SW2
PM-4SW3
PM-4SW4
PM-6SW2
PM-6SW3
PM-6SW4
PM-8SW2
PM-8SW3
PM-8SW4
3. Connection of Line and Load
The standard wiring of line and load on the circuit breaker is (a) normal connection shown on
the right. Avoid the wiring shown in (b) reverse connection, which may lead to the decrease in
breaking performance. However, the reverse connection is allowed for the following models
(except NF models with MDU).
NF-C series, NF-S series, NF-H series, NF-U series,
MB series, C • S • H series of NV400~800A Frame
Reverse connection is allowed for the standard models.
Load
Line
Normal connection (a) Reserve connection (b)
Normal and reverse connection methods
42

5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
1. Accessories
Table 5-1: Accessories
Internal accessories Function Applicable models Cassette-type of accessories
AL Alarm switch A switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the circuit breaker. NF-C·S·H·U,
●
Auxiliary switch A switch that electrically indicates the ON-OFF status of the circuit breaker.
NV-C·S·H·U
and MB series
●
AX
SHT
UVT
EAL
TBM
MG
PAL
OAL
OFF or ON
Trip
OFF or Trip
ON
Shunt trip
A
Note: (1) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are excluded.
Over current, short circuit
trip or on or off
Ground-fault trip
Undervoltage trip
A
Earth-leakage alarm switch
A
Test button module
This
Insulation switch
The
Pre-alarm module
Overcurrent trip alarm switch
Indicates
2. Switch Operation and Rating
Table 5-2: AL Switch Operation
Circuit breaker status
Table 5-3: AX Switch Operation
Circuit breaker status
Table 5-4: EAL Switch Operation
Circuit breaker status
250A frame or less
400A frame or more
250A frame or less
400A frame or more
Table 5-5: MG Switch Operation
Circuit breaker status
device that electrically trips the circuit breaker from a remote distance.
Permissible working voltages are 70 to 110% of the AC rated voltage or
70 to 125% of the DC rated voltage.
device that automatically trips the circuit breaker if the voltage is lowered.
Working voltages are 70 to 35% of the UVT rated voltage. When the voltage
recovers to 85% or higher, you can reset the device and put into operation.
switch that electrically indicates the trip status of the earth leakage circuit
breaker caused by a ground fault. If 250AF and less, This switch is available
only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).
module allows you a remote testing by applying a voltage.
An external sequence common to SHT can be used. (The standard
configuration requires the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT).)
incorporation of this switch enables the measurement of insulation resistance
between the terminals of the load with the circuit breaker being turned OFF.
that the load current exceeds the pre-alarm setting current.
Indicates that the breaker has been tripped by overcurrent or short-circuit current.
AL switch contact
AX switch contact
EAL switch contact
MG switch status
98/ALa (open)
96/ALb (closed)
95/ALc
98/ALa (closed)
96/ALb (open)
95/ALc
14/AXa (open)
12/AXb (closed)
11/AXc
14/AXa (closed)
12/AXb (open)
11/AXc
EALa (open)
EALc
EALa (open)
EALb (closed)
EALc
EALa (closed)
EALc
EALa (closed)
EALb (open)
EALc
Table 5-6: AL·AX·EAL Switch Rating (In case of EAL, 400AF and more)
Switch
type
S
V
*1
X
Note: *1. When DC use polarity must be considered.
Please contact us for applications in the field of smaller current values.
Table 5-7: EAL Switch Rating (250AF and less)
Voltage
(V)
Voltage
(V)
Resistive
load
AC
Resistive
load
Inductive
load
A control power supply (compatible to
100 and 200V AC) is required; see the
diagram on the right showing its wiring.
(The permissible range of voltage of the
control power supply is 80 to 242V AC,
and the power requirement is 10VA.)
NF-C·S·H·U
and MB series
NF-C·S·H·U, (Note 1)
NV-C·S·H·U
and MB series
NV-C·S·H·U –
NV-C·S·H·U –
NV-C·S·H·U –
Electronic Types –
Electronic Types
(SGW, HGW, RGW, UGW)
Current (A)
Inductive
load
Voltage
(V)
DC
Resistive
load
–
Current (A)
Inductive
load
460 – – 250 0.2 0.2
250 3 2 125 0.4 0.4
125 5 3 30 4 3
460
250
125
460
250
125
AC
Current A
5
10
10
5
10
10
200 3 2
100 3 2
2
10
10
2.5
10
10
250
125
30
250
125
30
0.3
0.6
10
5
10
10
●
●
0.3
0.6
Vertical lead-wire
terminal unit
EALa
Indicator lamp
(example)
P2 Control power
supply
P1(EALc)
6
3
6
10
OFF or Trip
MG switch (open)
ON
MG switch (closed)
43

3. Maximum Number of Internally Mounted Accessories
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
Left-side
Right-side
mounting
mounting MG EAL TBM Lead wire direction
Table 5-8: Combinations of Accessories
Series NF-C · S · H · U, MB NV-C · S · H · U
Type
Poles
NF30-CS
MB30-CS
NF32-SW
NF63-CW/SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW
NF32-SW(3P)
NF63-CW/SW/HW(3P)
NF125-CW(3P), NF125-SW(3P, 4P)
NF125-HW, NF125-SGW/HGW
NF125-RGW/UGW
NF160-SW/SGW/HW/HGW
NF250-CW/SW/HW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NF250-RGW/UGW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
MB100-SW, MB225-SW
NV32-SW
NV63-CW/SW/HW
NV125-CW/SW/HW
NV250-CW/SW/HW
NV250-SEW/HEW
NV125-RW, NV250-RW
2, 3 2
2, 3, 4 3
3, 4
(Note 7)
NV30-CS
(Note 7)
AL
1 2
(Note 7)
(Note 7)
AX
1 2
AL + AX
SHT or UVT
3-pole product only
(Note 7)
1 2
1 2
(Note 1)
(Note 2) (Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 7)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 4)
(Note 6)
AL + SHT or UVT
AX + SHT or UVT
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
5
Accessories
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
MG
(Note 7)
AL + MG
AX + MG
(Note 5)
EAL
(Note 9)
TBM
PAL
Notes: (1) Second AX can substitute the AL on the left-pole.
(2) Models with UVT require a UVT voltage module to be installed on the lead-wire terminal unit. (No such voltage module is required for SHT.) Part of UVT accessories is not of
cassette type. (Details will be available upon request.)
(3) UVTs for left-pole installation can be produced, if specified, for frame current values of 125A (excluding SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW).
(4) SHT cannot be installed.
(5) EALs are available only for models with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT). Specify a control power supply of either 100 or 200 V AC.
(6) Models NV250-SEW/HEW are not allowed to install the UVT device.
(7) The standard lead drawing is performed laterally. Load drawing is also available.
(8) Only the models with an SLT are available. EAL and PAL require a control power supply (shared 100 - 200 VAC).
For the 24 VDC TBM only, instruct us of a control voltage. (The standard shared voltage is 100 - 240 VAC/100 - 240 VDC.)
(9) Models CE marking are not allowed to install the TBM device.
Remarks: (1) Circled numbers indicate the order of installation.
(2) Accessories of EAL, and TBM can be installed independent of installations of AL, AX, and MG. (Two units among EAL, and TBM cannot be installed at the same time.)
44

5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
Right-side
mounting MG EAL TBL PAL TBM Lead wire direction
Type
NF-C/S/H
NF400-CW/SW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SDW
NF800-SEW/HEW/REW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
NF1250-SDW
NF1600-SDW
NF-U
NF400-UEW (3P)
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW
—
Poles
2, 3, 4
Switch
type
S V
✳3
AL
✳3
AX
1 3
2 4
1 5 3
2 6 4
1
2
5
3
4
6
SHT
or
UVT
✳1
✳2
✳1
✳2
✳2
✳3
✳3
AL + AX
Accessories
AL + SHT or UVT
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳4
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳4
✳2
AX + SHT or UVT
3
1
2
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳4
1 3
2 4
3
4
5
1
2
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳4
✳2
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳4
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳4
✳2
✳5
✳5
✳5
PAL
(contact output)
Option for
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (3P)
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
✳6
Option for NF400-UEW(4P)
NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
✳6
Option for NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1600-SEW
TI
Option for NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW (3P)
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
Option for NF400-UEW(4P)
NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
45
The number within the circle shows the order of mounting.
✳ 1.
SHT and UVT are right-pole mounting as standard. Please specify if left-pole mounting is required.
✳ 2. UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module) .
✳ 3. When mounting more than three left-pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special-order SLT is necessary .
✳ 4. When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX, or AL + AX, the UVT voltage module is separate .
✳ 5. SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100~200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker's right pole. )
✳ 6. SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100~200V/DC100~200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker's right pole. )

Left-side
mounting
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT TI Cassette-type accessories
Right-side
mounting MG EAL TBL PAL TBM Lead wire direction
Type
NV-C/ S/H
NV400-CW/SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Poles
3, 4
NV800-SEW/HEW
Switch
type
S
✳2
AL
✳2
AX
✳1
✳1
SHT or UVT
AL + AX
✳2
✳2
5
Accessories
AL + SHT or UVT
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳1
✳2
✳3
AX + SHT or UVT
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳1
✳2
✳3
AL + AX + SHT or UVT
✳1
✳2
✳3
✳1
✳2
✳3
MG
AL + MG
The number within the circle shows the order of mounting.
✳ 1. UVT mounting requires a UVT voltage module (SHT requires no such voltage module) .
✳ 2. When mounting more than three left-pole mounting devices by SLT, or when mounting a SHT or UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX, a special-order SLT is necessary .
✳ 3. When mounting a UVT to the same pole as the AL, AX or AL + AX. the UVT voltage module is separate .
46

5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT
Right-side
mounting MG EAL TBL PAL
TI
TBM
Lead wire direction
Type
NV-C/ S/H
NV400-CW/SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW
NV630-SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
Poles
3, 4
Switch
type
S
AX + MG
AL + AX + MG
EAL
Accessories
TBL
TBM
✳1
✳1
PAL (contact output)
Option for NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Option for NV800-SEW/HEW
✳2
✳2
TI
Option for NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-SEW/HEW
Option for NV800-SEW/HEW
The number within the circle shows the order of mounting.
1. EAL, TBL, and TBM can be mounted regardless of the number of AL, AX, SHT, UVT and MG accessories. (However, two EALs, TBLs or TBMs cannot be mounted simultaneously.)
2. The PAL’s dimensions and specifications change for the NF-C/S and NV-C/S series.
✳ 1.
SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100-200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker’s right pole.)
✳ 2.
SLT-equipped is standard. Control voltage (AC100-200V/DC100-200V) is necessary. (In this case, no other accessories can be mounted to the breaker’s right pole.)
47

Left-side
mounting
Handle AL AX SHT or UVT
Right-side
mounting
Type
NF-C/S/H
NF50-SWU
NF100-CWU
NF100-SWU
NF50-SWU
NF100-CWU
NF100-SWU
NF-SFW
NF-SJW
NF-HJW
NF225-CWU NF-SKW NF-SLW
Poles
2 3
3
Switch
type
S S
(Note 6)
AL
1 2
1 2
1 2
(Note 6)
AX
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 3
2 4
1 5 3
2 6 4
(Note 1) (Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
(Note 2)
SHT
or
UVT
Accessories
AL + AX
1 2
1 2
(Note 4)
1 2
1 2
(Note 4)
1 2
1 2
(Note 4) (Note 6)
(Note 6)
5
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
(Note 1)
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
AL + SHT or UVT
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
(Note 1)
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
AX + SHT or UVT
1 3
2 4
5
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
AL + AX + SHT
or
UVT
(Note 1)
(Note 4)
(Note 1)
(Note 4)
(Note 2)
(Note 4)
(Note 1)
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
(Note 1)
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 7)
Notes: (1) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.)
(2) If a UVT is used, a UVT voltage module is installed on the lead wire terminal block. (The SHT requires no voltage module.) No cassette is attached to the UVT.
(3) If a UVT is used, the UVT voltage module is externally installed. (The SHT requires no voltage module).
(4) The 2nd AX can be installed instead of the AL on the left pole.
(5) The standard mounting of the SHT and the UVT is performed on the right pole. If mounting on the left pole is required, instruct us. (The UVTs for interlocks are mounted on the left pole.)
(6) We can manufacture the SLTs used when 3 or more accessories are installed on the left pole and the SLTs used when the AL and the AX are attached on the same pole that is
attached with the SHT or the UVT at your order.
(7) If a UVT is used and an AL, an AX or an AL + an AX are attached to the same pole that is attached with the UVT, the UVT voltage module is separately installed.
Remarks: (1) Encircled numbers show the order of mounting.
48

5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
4. Shunt Trip (SHT)
Table 5-9: Standard Coil Rating
Series
32(30) • 63A Frame
125A Frame
(NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW are excluded)
160 • 250A Frame
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
Cut-off
switch
Voltage (V)
AC100-240
380-550
(Compatible to 50 and 60Hz. )
DC100-125
Input power requirement (VA) (Note 1)
AC
DC
50
120
60
Operating time (ms) (Note 2)
15 or less
NF-C • S • H • U
MB
NV-C • S • H • U
400 • 630 • 800 Frame
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV800-SEW/HEW
Equipped
AC100~450/DC100~200
(50 also 60Hz)
100V : 20
200V : 50
330V : 120
450V : 170
100V : 10
200V : 35
5~15
1000 • 1250 • 1600 Frame
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
AC100-120
200-240
380-450
(50 also 60Hz)
DC100
200 70 7~15
Notes: (1) Secure a sufficient input power so that the voltage will not drop below the permissible lower working voltage (70% of the lowest rated voltage).
(2) The operating time denotes the time from when the rated voltage is applied to SHT until when the main contact of the breaker starts to open.
Table 5-10: Coil Ratings (List of manufacturable special voltages)
A C ( V )
D C (V )
MCCB type
24
24~48 48
380
~ 550
12
24
24~36 36
36~48 48
110
125
220
~250
AC/DC
(V)
24
~48
NF-C • S • H • U
MB
32(30) • 63A Frame 125A Frame 160 • 250A Frame
–
● – –
● – ● – ● – – – ● –
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-SDW/CEW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW, NV800-SEW/HEW
– – – ● ● – – – – – – – –
●
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
● – ● – ● ● – ● – ● ● ● – –
5. Undervoltage Trip (UVT)
Table 5-11: Coil Rating
Series
250AF and less
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
Voltage (V)
(Note 1)
Standard voltage Special voltage (note 5)
AC100-110/120-130 selectable
200-220/230-250 selectable
380-415/440-480 selectable
(Note4)
DC100/110 selectable
AC100-110
200-220
400-440
(Note4)
DC100
AC100-120
200-240
380-450
(Note4)
DC100-110
AC24/48 selectable
500-550/600 selectable
DC24/48 selectable
110/125 selectable
AC110-120
220-240
380-415
440-480
500-550
(Note4)
DC24
48
110
AC24
48
440-480
500-550
(Note4)
DC24
48
120-125
Input
power
(VA)
Operating
time (ms)
(Note 2) (Note 3)
5 30 or less
5 5~30
5 5~35
Notes: (1) A desired voltage can be selected by changing the terminal wiring.
(2) The operating time denotes the time from when no voltage is applied to UVT until when the main contact of the breaker
starts to open.
(3) Time-delayed types can be produced. Details will be available upon request.
(4) Compatible to 50 and 60Hz
(5) Rated voltage differs according to make and country of manufacture.Please consult your dealer.
● UVT Voltage Module
The UVT voltage module is
normally installed on the
vertical lead-wire terminal
unit (SLT). (A separatemount
type can be produced
upon request.)
Circuit
breaker
D3/P3
D2/P2
J1/UC1
J2/UC2
UVT Voltage Module Wiring Diagram
(Lead-Wire Connection)
UVT voltage module
D1/P1
J1/UC1
J2/UC2
49

6. Test Button Module (TBM)
● The effect of pressing the test button on the breaker main body is
produced while the input control voltage is applied. (Apply the voltage
for more than two seconds for the breaker main body of time-delayed
NV models.)
● The model with the vertical lead-wire terminal unit (SLT) is standard.
Table 5-12
Series
NV-C • S • H • U
18
Input rated
control
voltage (V)
Input control
power (VA)
Compatible to
AC100-240/
DC100-240
(DC24) (Note 1)
1VA or less
Note: (1) The specifications of 100-240V
AC/100-240V DC are standard
unless otherwise specified. The
specifications of 24 V DC are
available if requested.
7
12.5
10.5
(10.5)
TBM2
TBM1
92 (Terminal
cover)
7. Lead-wire Specifications
Table 5-13
Type Size Length Marking Ring-mark example
Heatresistant
wire
0.5mm 2 (Note 1)
450mm
A ring-mark marked
by the terminal symbol
is attached to each
lead-wire.
98/ALa , 96/ALb , 95/ALc
C1/S1 , C2/S2
Note: (1) The length is 400 mm for the model of four-pole, right-pole installation.
● Lead wires are normally extended laterally.
● Grooves are provided standardly on the side face of the breaker,
allowing the extension of the lead wires along them. (Note 1)
Note: (1) The models of NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, 400Aframe and more are excluded.
5
8. Internal Terminal Type (INT)
● This unit is an internal accessory that is provided with terminal screws for lead-wire connection.
Remark: (1) Available for the models of NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW.
50

5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
9. Vertical Lead-wire Terminal Block (SLT)
● The circuit beaker can be mounted, being closely fitted to the unit.
● Terminal screws are arranged in a zigzag pattern, and screws can be tightened further after wiring.
● A terminal cover is provided standardly.
● This unit supports the models of front connection, rear connection, and plug-in type (excluding PLT).
■NFB
86.5 B
A C
Terminal cover
(Skeleton)
25 10.5
10.5
18
7
12.5
D
Table 5-14: Summary of Dimensions
Applicable models A B C D
4
4.5 44.5 4.5
7
17.5 54 17.5
NF30-CS, MB30-CS
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
NF50-SWU
NF125-CW/SW/HW
NF100-CWU, NF100-SWU
NF125-HGW, NF225-HGW
NF-SFW,NF-SJW, NF-HJW
NF250-CW/SW/HW, NF225-CWU, NF160-SW/HW
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF-SKW, NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NF-SLW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW, NF1600-SEW/SDW
NF400-UEW(3P)
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW
Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m
7
7
7
25
25
7
41
62.5
138
27.5
19
29
25
35
37
79.5
88.5
173
119.5
135.5
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
52
54
54
27.5
19
29
25
35
37
79.5
88.5
173
119.5
135.5
M3.5 terminal screw
26
14
86.5 B
Terminal cover
(Skeleton)
25 10.5
10.5
18
F
G
Applicable models A B C D E
4 4.5 44.5 44.5 4
7 17.5 54 52 7
7 19 54 54 7
7 37 54 52 2.5
7 80 54 54 7
7 112 54 52 2.5
41 79.5 54 52 26.5
88.5 54 52 26.5
7
12.5
D
NV30-CS
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
NV125-CW/SW/HW
NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, NV225-CWU
NV125-RW
NV250-RW
NV400-CW/SW/HW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
41
Remarks: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m
(2) Lead-wire terminal block for TBL is attached to right-side.
F
4.5
21.5
19
37
80
112
79.5
88.5
G
86.5
92
86.5
92
86.5
92
92
92
A
C
M3.5 terminal screw
38
38
8
13.5
■NV
Table 5-15: Summary of Dimensions
26
14
8
13.5
E
■14 Terminals SLT
B
SLT when three and more than
three pieces of internal accessories
are mounted on left-side.
Terminal cover
(Skeleton)
115
11
11
11
41
9
25
Table 5-16
Applicable models
NFB
NV
NF400-CW/SW/SEW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW
NF400-HEW/REW, NF-SKW
NV400-HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF630-HEW/REW
NF400-UEW(3P)
–
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW
NF800-HEW/REW, NF-SLW
NV800-SEW/HEW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
–
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW
–
Remark: (1) Terminal screw tightening torque M3.5 ··· 0.9~1.2N·m
A
B
20
60
117
100
20
69
35 154
117
116
7
M3.5 terminal screw
17
A 75
51

10. Pre-Alarm Module (PAL)
This module functions to give alarm output when
load current exceeds a preset current level and
serves for securing continuous power supply and
also for preventive maintenance. The electronic
breakers with mount digital ETR of 125 to
1600AF are provided with this module as an
option. (Some modules are with this module as
standard equipment.)
Table 5-17
NF125-SGW/HGW
NF160-SGW/HGW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NV250-SEW/HEW
Type
NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW
NF400-UEW NF630-SEW NF630-HEW
NF630-REW NF800-CEW NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW NF800-REW NF800-UEW
NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW NV800-SEW
NV800-HEW
NF1000-SEW NF1250-SEW NF1600-SEW
Pre-alarm LED
(Auto reset)
Standard equipment
Solid state relay (SSR) output-
Contacties output (Auto reset)
Option
Option
—
Pre-alarm module-Contact output (1a)
S witching capacity ( Self-holding)
Switching
capacit y
24VDC 100-200VAC
20mA
24VDC 100-200VAC
20mA
Option
100VAC or
200VAC 2A
Reset system
Press the reset switch or
turn off control power.
Pre-alarm LED
Solid-state relay output
Pre-alarm module
• Pre-alarm characteristics
Operating time
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10%
-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarm
operatiing time Tp
TL
Tp= ± 20%
2
(at 200%)
The LED starts blinking on the circuit breaker when load current exceeds the preset current, then changes to continuous glowing
when pre-alarm output is given.
Open the upper cover of the circuit breaker, connect the connector of the lead wire packed together and use it as the lead wire
outlet. In this case, only the lead wire outlet of the internal accessories can be attached to the right pole. (For flush plate type,
the outlet is manufactured in advanced as a PAL mount.)
SLT is attached as standard and is used as the control power source of 100VAC or 200VAC. In this case, no other internal
accessories can be attached to the right pole. (Auto resetting is also applicable.)
Pre-alarm pick-up current
LTD operating time TL
60-80-100s ± 20%
(at 200%)
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500
Current
Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating
(NF/NV125,250AF)
Operating time
10h
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ± 10%
-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarm
operatiing time Tp
TL
Tp= ± 20%
2
(at 200%)
Pre-alarm pick-up current
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%)
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500
Current
Percentage (%) to rated current or preset current rating
NF/NV400,630,800AF
NF1000,1250,1600AF
5
PAL OUT LED
RISET
Reset switch
PALa
Indicator lamp (Example)
P2
P1
(PALc)
(100VAC or 200VAC)
Control power pre-alarm output
In the case of flush plate type. this is mounted on back
side of the circuit breaker.
52

5. Accessories
Internal Accessories
11. Trip Indicator (TI)
When the breaker is tripped, this accessory installed on the right side will
display the cause of the trip--either long delay (LTD) , short or instantaneous
(STD/INST), earth-leakage (EAL) (with earth-leakage breakers only)--on its
LED and output an alarm signal. In this case, both LTD and STD/INST are
treated as overcurrent trips (OAL) and output signals. Pre-alarm is also
output. Again, with this module, it is impossible to connect other internal
accessories to the breaker’s right side.)
Table 5-18
Type
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
LED contents
Long-time delay, Short-time delay, Instantaneous, Pre-alarm
98
25
control power supply
P1
P2
Control voltage
Long-time delay(LTD) alarm LED
Pre-alarm(PAL)LED
Earth-leakage alarm (EAL)LED
Short-time(STD),
instantaneous(INST) alarm LED
Reset switch
PALa
Pre-alarm output
PALc
OALa Overcurrent
OALc alarm output
EALa Earth -leakage
EALc alarm output
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
Long-time delay, Short-time delay, Instantaneous,
Earth-leakage, Pre-alarm
✳ Requires 100-200VAC control voltage.
12. 3ø4W Neutral-pole protection Relay (NR)
●
In a 3-phase 4-wire circuits, the voltage rise of the circuit by phase failure of a neutral line is detected, and a
contact output is taken out.
Table 5-19
Phase/wire type
Rated
voltage
Usable supply voltage
Usable voltage (line voltage)
Tripping
characteristics
Trip
indication method
eset method
Total
operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (135% of total phase voltage)
Total
non-operating overvoltage (phase voltage) (120% of total phase voltage)
T otal overvoltage operating time
)
O vervoltage non-operating time
)
3 ø 4W
VAC
415
VAC
304~484
VAC
380
400
415
440
VAC
296
312
323
343
VAC
263
277
288
305
( s
1
( s
More than 0. 1
Button
Reset button (open-phase display use
1c
R )
External output contacts
Remark: Using with a shunt-trip device (SHT) equipped breaker will improve tripping and phase protection.
AC
Voltage
cos ø
1.0
. 4
Voltage
100,
120V 7A
7A
0V
200,
240V 7A
7A
25V
415V
5A
2A
50V
DC
L/R
0 0 0.007
3 7A
6A
1 0.6A
0.6A
2 0.3A
0.3A
68 7.5
20
63
R pole S Pole T Pole
Test button
Operation display
(reset button)
Current switch
N pole NRaNRbNRc
Item output terminal
60
11.5 11.5
83
Drilling plan
ø5mm or M4 x 0.7mm screw
52 52
min.12
52
92.5
57
37.5
M3.5 x 0.6 screw
self-tap terminal
74
6
109
4.8 x 6.8 mounting hole
mounting screw M4 x 0.7 mm
10.5
39
9.5
53

5. Accessories
External Accessories
TR
1. V-type Operating Handle
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● Outside Dimension Diagram
A
Front base
Front plate
Center of Hinge and
Circuit Breaker
Handle
Front plate
I P
PED
O
N
B
90
H
H
OFF
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker main
enables the isolation function effective.
● The safety standards of EN Standards
(EN60204-1) are satisfied.
● Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP65 is
satisfied standardly.
● OFF-position lock only is available for up to three
commercial padlocks (35mm, 40mm).
● A door-lock mechanism allows the door to be
opened at OFF-position only.
RESET
16
90
Plate
thickness
1.2–3.2
● Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram
Center of the
circuit breaker
operating handle
H
C L
54
C
Minimum E
Maximum F
Circuit breaker Center of the
operating handle
Center of the circuit
breaker operating handle
H
D
Center of the
circuit breaker
(Note 1)
Left
Hinge
X
Circuit
breaker
C L C L
C L C L
(Note 1)
C L
H
X
0 or more (5H+100) or more
The above illustration shows a view
of the hinges and the circuit breaker
when viewed from the direction of
the load.
● Front Plate Drilling
Dimension Diagram
Center of the circuit breaker
operating handle
ø9
X
Right
Hinge
G
Either M4×0.7
screw or ø5
G
J
G
Either M4×0.7
screw or ø5
Circuit
breaker
C L
ø54
54
Table 5-20: Summary of Dimensions
Type name
Applicable models
3-pole
4-pole
Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of both V2GSW and V2GSWF.
Number
of poles
Dimensions (mm)
A B C D E F G H J
3P 75
V05SW NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW
154 300
4P 100
NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW
130 44 61
MB50-CW/SW
3P 75
V05SWF (Note 2)
125 –
4P 100
3P 90
V1SW
154 518
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW
4P 120
130 44 61
MB100-SW
3P 90
V1SWF (Note 2)
125 –
4P 120
2P, 3P 105
V2SW
154 518
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW
4P 140
165 46 61
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW
2P, 3P 105
V2SWF (Note 2)
125 –
4P 140
2P, 3P 105
V2GSW
172 536
4P 140
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW
165 46 79
2P, 3P 105
V2GSWF (Note 2)
143 –
4P 140
Notes: (1) This hole is not required for two and three poles.
(2) The last letter of “F” of the type designations of V-type operating handles denotes a fixed type.
Remark: (1) You may contact us for details of the V-type operating handle for the U series.
54
25 111
30 111
35 126
35 126
–
12.5
–
12.5
–
15
–
15
–
17.5
–
17.5
–
17.5
–
17.5
5
✽Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
● Can be locked in OFF position only.
● The door is locked when ON and can only be
opened in OFF position.
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with
IEC60529): IP65.
External dimensions
A
B
C
Handle
Front panel
Outview
Drilling plan
Breaker
Center of
breaker's handle
63
104
4- 10
104
L
Center of
breaker's handle
Breaker
M6 screw
or 7
N
Hinge
(left side)
X
N
O or more
Breaker
X
Front panel
N
X
P or more
Hinge
(right side)
Table 5-21
Type
Panel
thickness
1.2~3.2
E
G
D F Minimum J
Maximum K
MCCB
H
(a)
B reakers type
F ig.
Dimensions (mm)
ELCB
V4SW
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW
N F400-HEW
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW
—
NF630-HEW
NV400-CW, NV400-SW
V4SWNV
—
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW
NV630-CW, NV630-SW
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
V8SW
NF800- CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW
V4SWF
N F400-HEW
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW
—
NF630-HEW
NV400-CW, NV400-SW
V4SWFNV
—
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW
NV630-CW, NV630-SW
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
V8SWF
NF800-CEW,NF800-SDW,
NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
Outvie w
a
(b)
M
(c)
The above illustration shows a view
of the hinges and the circuit breaker
when viewed from the direction of
the load.
Drilling
A B C D E F G H J K L M P
plan
b, c
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW 75
257
140
140
140
25
62
76
97
217
539
194
44
8N+150
275
140
210
140
25
62
76
97
217
539
243
70
8N+150
257
140
140
140
25
62
76
97
191
– 194
44
8N+150
2 140
210
140
25
62
76
97
191
– 243
70
8N+150
54

O F
F
OFF
ON
ON
REL
E
5. Accessories
External Accessories
2. F-type Operating Handle
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker
enables the isolation function effective.
● The standard model is equipped with a safety
device that prevents the circuit breaker from
being turned on if the door is open. (If not
desired, please specify so.)
● The handle can be locked at either ON or
OFF position. (Three padlocks (35mm,
40mm) can be installed. OFF-position lock
only specifications are also acceptable.)
● Degrees of protection (IEC60529) IP3X
(IP5X with dustproof packing)
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected
(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
● Outside Dimension Diagram
RESET
OPEN
● Drilling Dimension Diagram
Center of the circuit
breaker operating handle 4-ø12
Circuit
breaker
CL
TRIPPED
104
CL
78
AS E
ø90
104
78
51
Plate
thickness 1.2–3.2
A±2
Circuit breaker
CL
(a)
(b)
CL
B
Center of
the circuit
breaker
and the
operating
handle
(b)
(a)
C
D
Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
Left hinge
Right hinge
H X1 H X2
Left hinge
Front plate
H
X1
Operating handle
circuit
breaker
The above illustration shows a view of
the hinges and the circuit breaker when
viewed from the direction of the load.
Table 5-22: Summary of Dimensions
Type name
Applicable models
Number
Dimensions (mm)
of poles A *1 B C D
*2 F05SW2P *3 F05SWR2P NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW 2P
–
*2 F05SW *3 F05SWR
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW 3P, 4P
111
25
NV63-CW/SW
3P 105
Either
*2 F1SW2P *3 F1SWR2P NF125-CW/SW/HW 2P –
M4×0.7
111
*2 F1SW *3 F1SWR NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW
3P, 4P 30
screw or ø5
*2 F2SW *3 F2SWR NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW 2P, 3P, 4P 107 35 126
*2 F2GSW *3 F2GSWR NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW
3P, 4P 125 35 126
*1. Dimensions of both front connection and rear connection are shown. The plug-in type has a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker.
*2. The standard type is epuipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows door to be opened only when OFF operation is carried out.
*3. In case of reset opened type use.
Remarks: (1) The test button becomes difficult to press when an operating handle is installed on an NV model. Then, use models with either TBM instead.
(2) Dustproof packings are separately available.
(3) You may consult us for details of the F-type operating handle for the U series.
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● External dimensions
Center of Hinge and Circuit Breaker
RESTE
TPRIEPD
Flusf plate
150
Front panel
0
or more
Left
hinge
(5H+100)
or more
Less than
10
10
or more
X2
H
170
or more
(5H+120)
or more
Right hinge
Mounting
screws
(a) Circuit
breaker
mounting screws
(2pcs)
(b) Handle
mounting screws
(2pcs)
Right hinge
H X1
H X2
0 or more ( 8H +150) or more
0 or more
(4H + 120) or more
● Includes as standard a safety device which
prevents breaker closing as long as the cover is
open. (Specify if this safety feature is not required.)
● Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in
ON-lock position--but only in cases when a
single padlock (35mm, 40mm) is used.
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with
IEC60529): IP3X (IP5X with dustproof
packing).
Table 5-23
F4SW ~ F8UW
Type
*6 F4SW *7 F4SWR
*6 F4SWNV *7 F4SWRNV
*6 F4UW *7 F4UWR
*6 F8SW *7 F8SWR
*6 F8SWNV *7 F8SWRNV
*6 F8UW *7 F8UWR
*7 F10SW
*7 F10SW4P
F10SW ~ F120UR4P
*1. Handles with NV in the product name include a test button.
*2. Dustproof packing is also available as an option.
*3. Other optional handles can also be mounted.
*4. F4SW~F8UW are for isolation purposes.
(Speify OFF lock only.)
Breaker type
(a)
● Drilling plan
Center of breaker
F
112
118
4- 15
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW , NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW , NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HE W
NF400-UEW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV800-SEW/HEW
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
150
Release screw
112
(b)
Plate thickness 1.2-3.2
B A ± 2
Breaker
(X)
(Y)
C
Number of poles
2P, 3P, 4P
3P, 4P
P
2P, 3P, 4P
3P, 4P
(Y)
(X)
D
E
(c)
External
dimensions
Left hinge
H
X1
F-type operating handle
Front panel
Breaker
H
Right hinge
The figure above shows the relationship
between the hinge and breaker viewed
from the load side of the breaker.
F ig
Dimensions (mm)
Drilling
*5
p lan
A B C D E F
183
44
194
3 280
44
234
M6 screw
20
53
or ø7
a b c 183
70
243
—
3P, 4P
2P, 3P
4P
*5. The figures show the dimensions of the front connection. Some connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference
surface for mounting purposes.
*6. The standard type is equipped with a door-lock mechanism that allows the door to be opened only when OFF operation is
carried out.
*7. In case of reset opened type use.
X2
—
280 70
290
23. 5
221 50 70 375
M8 screw
or ø10
—
Mounting
crews
(X), (Y)
Breaker
mounting
screws
(4 pcs)
55

F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Specification explanation for F-type operating handles
Specification Detailed explanation Kind
The position where it can lock
ON and OFF-position lock
with the padlock.
Handle lock position
Can not open, when it use
padlock.
TRIPPED
ON
OFF-position lock only
TRIPPED
ON
TRIPPED
1
ON
2
When OFF-lock, please turn
handle in RESET direction.
O F
RESET
O F
RESET
O F
RESET
The door can be opened with the
operating handle RESET-position
or OFF-position.
When the operating handle was
locked, the panel (door) can not
be opened.
OFF-position
TRIPPED
ON
RESET-position open
RESET-position
Lock lever
TRIPPED
ON
OFF-position open
OFF-position
TRIPPED
ON
Door opening system
O F
O F
O F
RESET
RESET
RESET
Lock plate
Lock lever locked
by lock plate
Lock lever unlocked
by lock plate
Lock lever unlocked
by lock plate
Mounting direction
The top of label is ON side of
breaker
ON side
Reconstruction to vertically from
horizontally can not be
performed.
Vertically type
(ON side of breaker is upper)
TRIPPED
ON
Horizontally type
(ON side of breaker is left)
TRIPPED
ON
Horizontally type
(ON side of breaker is right)
TRIPPED
ON
5
O F
O F
O F
RESET
RESET
RESET
Label
For emergency stop use.
For emergency
(In accordance with EN60204-1)
TRIPPED
ON
Red color
You may consult us for details
*
of emergency
O F
RESET
Yellow color
56

5. Accessories
External Accessories
OFF
ON
57
3. S-type Operating Handle
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● The handle can be locked at either ON or
OFF position. (Three padlocks (35mm,
40mm) can be installed. Off-position lock only
specifications are also acceptable.)
● Digrees of protection (IEC60529) IP5X
Remark: (1) Trip action can be displayed when the circuit
breaker trips even if ON-position lock is selected
(only in the case of a single padlock (35 mm)).
Table 5-24: Summary of Dimensions
Type name
S05SW
Table 5-25
max. 150
max. 145
● Outside Dimension Diagram
Operating plate
Max. 95
Max. 115
Operating
plate
34 40
47
59
Front plate
Face plate
Front panel
Decorative plate
(a)
OFF
OFF
TRIP
45
ON
TRIP ON
55
110
110
–
–
–
–
Operating plate
114
Operating plate
114
130(S4CP·S4SP)
180(S100)
80
● Front Plate Drilling Dimension Diagram
*3
62
35 ± 5
*1
Retainer
Center of breaker's
handle
*1
Retainer
*2
Retainer
(option)
ø62
(Note 3)
41.5±4
Clasp
(Note 1)
Center of the circuit breaker
operating handle
17
Notes: (1) The clasps are not supplied standardly, and should be prepared by users Details on dimensions and others will be available upon request.
(2) When the optional clasp is used.
(3) The tolerance from the center of ø62 is shown.
(4) The dimensions of the front-face type are shown. Some of the back-face and plug-in types have a different reference plane for mounting the circuit breaker.
(5) The front plate drilling dimensions for the U series differ from those shown above. Please consult us for their details.
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● 4- 5.5
External dimensions
● Drilling plan
● Indicates the tripping of the breaker even in
ON-lock position--but only in cases when a
single padlock
(35mm or 40mm) is used.
● Degrees of protection (in accordance with
IEC60529): IP5X.
Applicable models
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
S1SW NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW (Note 5)
Clasp
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
Clasp
(option)
45
84
12
*5
Deviation: 2 mm or less
Front panel
Deviation: 5mm or less
110 or more (250 or more if hinge
is mounted on the left)
*3
25 102 ± 5 Front panel applicable thickness : 1.6 to 3.2
– –
70
(Note 3)
43.5±4
A ± 2
B ± 2
47
Fastening
84
4-ø4.5
9
70
Hinge
Center of the circuit
breaker
Deviation
of 4mm
or less
ø12
Front plate deviation of 4mm or less
100 or more (210 or more
when the hinge is on the left)
Front plate thickness 1.2–3.2
Fastening
A±2
B±2
(Note 2) C±2
Hinge
Reference plane for mounting
the circuit breaker
Dimensions (mm)
A (Note 4) B (Note 4) C (Note 4)
87 102 104.5
S2SW
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW, NV250-RW (Note 5)
95 110 112.5
S2GSW NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW 113 128 130.5
Remark: (1) Reset open-type
(2) These are not suitable for isolation.
Centre of
breaker
D
(b)
Reference plane
for mounting the breaker
F ig
Dimensions (mm)
Type
Breaker type
External
dimensions
Drilling
plan A✳4 B✳4 C✳4 D
S *5 4CW NF400-CW, NV400-CW a b 140
156
— 0
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
162
178
— 0
S4SW *5 NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV800-SEW/HEW a b
NF400-UEW (3P) 259
275
— 20
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW
259 275
— 23.5
S10SW
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
a
b
199 215 — 0
Notes: *1. Retainers are not included. They must be provided by the customer.
Remark: (1) Reset open-type
*2. When using optional retainer.
*3. Shows the tolerance for the distance from the center of a 62mm dia. hole.
*4. The figures show the front-connection dimensions. Some rear-connection and plug-in breakers have a different reference surface for mounting purposes.
*5. S4CW and S4SW are for isolation purposes. (Specify OFF lock only.) The tolerance is less than 5mm. It does not conform to isolation purposes, however, if the deviation is more than 2mm.
●Surface plate interlocking fastening (separately available)
Operation
handle series
Type
NF32-SW
NF63-CW/SW/HW
TG-S05SW MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
NF125-CW/SW/HW
MB100-SW
TG-S1UW NF125-RGW/UGW
NF160-SW/HW
TG-S2SW NF250-CW/SW/HW
NF250-SEW/HEW,MB225-SW
TG-S2UW NF250-RGW/UGW
S-type
TG-S2GSW
NF125-SGW/HGW
NF160-SGW/HGW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NF-SFW, NF-SJW, NF-HJW
TG-S4CW NF400-CW
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
TG-S4SW NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW
TG-S4UW
NF400-UEW (3P)
NF400-UEW (4P), NF800-UEW
TG-S10
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
Remark: The clamp for surface plate interlock fastener is common to 2P, 3P and 4P.
Breaker type
Dimensions (mm)
MCCB ELCB A B
NV32-SW
NV63-CW/SW/HW
NV125-CW/SW/HW
NV125-RW
NV250-CW/SW/HW
NV250-SEW/HEW
NV250-RW
NV400-CW
NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
67
67
87
67
119
119
119
119
Drilling diagram and referential diagram
Center of
the breaker
A
16
M5 screw
for attaching
the fastening
B
OFF
Center of the
handle of breaker
ON
Breaker
Drilling diagram

4. R-type Operating Handle
● Appearance (Color N1.5)
● Outside Dimension Diagram
A
Handle
B
88
16
88
E
D
C
● This handle in conjunction with the breaker main
enables the isolation function effective.
● OFF-position lock only is available for up to three
commercial padlocks (ø8).
● Equipped with cylinder key (option) prevent
deliberate operation.
● Mounting-hole Drilling Dimension Diagram
Center of the
circuit breaker
operating handle
G
C L
Circuit breaker Center of the
operating handle
Center of the circuit
breaker operating handle
G
Center of the
circuit breaker
C L C L
C L C L
(Note 1)
Center of the circuit
breaker operating handle
Center of the
circuit breaker
G
C L
C L
C L
H
(Note 1)
Table 5-26: Summary of Dimensions
Type name
R1SW
Applicable models
NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HW
NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125-HW
Number
of poles
F
Either M4×0.7
screw or ø5
Center of the
(a) 2, 3-pole
(b) 4-pole
operating handle (c)
F
J
F
Either M4×0.7
screw or ø5
Note 1: The drilling at this position is not required for the models of R2GSW.
3P a 90
4P
Fig
Drilling
plan
b
F
Either M4×0.7
screw or ø5
Dimensions (mm)
A B C D E F G H J
120
130
61 105 142 30 111 —
—
15
5
R1UW NV125-RW
3P c 90
191
61
105
142
30
172
30.5
—
R2SW
NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250-CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW
NV250-CW, NV250-SW, NF250-HW, NV250-SEW
NV250-HEW
2P, 3P
4P
a
b
105
140
165
61
107
144
35
126
—
—
17.5
R2UW
NV250-RW
3P
c
105
240
61
107
144
35
201
37.5
—
R2GSW
NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW,
NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW
2P, 3P
4P
a
b
105
140
165
79
125
162
35
126
—
—
17.5
R2GUW
NF125-RGW, NF125-UGW, NF250-RGW, NF250-UGW
3P
c
105
240
79
125
162
35
201
37.5
—
✽ Equipped with cylinder key (option) to prevent deliberate operation.
● Can be locked in OFF position only.
Outview External dimensions Drilling plan
Breaker
A
B
K
M6 screw
or 7
Table 5-27
Type
R4SW
R4SWNV
R8SW
(a)
Breaker
type
MCCB
NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW,
D
C
ELCB
NF400-HEW —
NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW,
NF630-HEW
—
NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW,
NF800-HEW
NV400-CW, NV400-SW,
NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW
NV630-CW, NV630-SW,
NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW
NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW
E
F
H
J
G
F ig
Dimensions (mm)
Drilling
Outview
A B C D E F G H J K L
plan
a
b
L
(b)
257
128
140
140
25
43
97
174
218
194
44
—
275
128
210
140
25
43
97
174
218
243
70
M
—
58

5. Accessories
External Accessories
Ordering information
V
1)
1
2)
SW
3)
1) V : Operating handle type
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) E : For emergency
5) F : Adjustment type of
depth (For only V-handle)
6) NV : Type of breaker
S
1)
1
2)
SW
3)
1) S : Operating handle type
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) A : Handle lock position
S
1)
10
2)
SW
3)
1) S : Operating handle type
2) 10 : Frame size of breaker
E
4)
A
4)
F
5)
3) SW : Series name SW indicate WSS
NV
6)
V······· Variable-depth handle
R······· Rotary handle
05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW,
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW,
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW,
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
MB225-SW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW,
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW,
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN400-CW/SW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN630-CW/SW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV800-SEW/HEW, DSN800-CW/SW
SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
UW indicate WSS U series
Blank······ For general
E············ For emergency
Blank······ Variable type
F············ Fix type
NV·········· NV type for 400A frame
Blank······ The other
05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW,
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW,
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW,
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
MB225-SW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW,
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN400-CW/SW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NF400-UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN630-CW/SW, DSN800-CW/SW,
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-UEW(4P)
NF630-UEW, NF800-UEW
SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
CW indicate WSS 400A frame C series
Blank······ ON/OFF position lock
A············ OFF position lock only
10···········NF1000-SS/SSD, NF1250-SS/SSD,
NF1600-SS/SSD, NF1250-UR
F
1)
1
2)
SW
3)
1) F : Operating handle type
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) A : Handle lock position
5) R : Door open position
6) Y : Mounting direction
7) 2P : Number of poles
8) NV : Type of breaker
F
1)
R
1)
10
2)
1
2)
SW
3)
1) R : Operating handle type
2) 1 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) NV : Type of breaker
SW
3)
1) F : Operating handle type
2) 10 : Frame size of breaker
3) SW : Series name
4) 4P : Number of poles
A
4)
4P
4)
NV
4)
R
5)
Y
6)
2P
7)
NV
8)
05····· NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW,
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW,
DSN32-SW, DSN63-CW/SW,
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW,
DSN125-CW/SW, NV125-RW
2······· NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
MB225-SW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW/SEW/HEW,
DSN250-CW/SW, NV250-RW
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW,
NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-SGW/HGW, DSN125-SGW,
DSN160-SGW, DSN250-SGW,
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN400-CW/SW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NF400-UEW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW,
DSN630-CW/SW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW,
NV800-SEW/HEW, NF400-UEW(4P),
NF800-UEW, DSN800-CW/SW
SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
UW indicate WSS U series
Blank······ ON/OFF position lock
A············ OFF position lock only
Blank······ OFF position open
R············ RESET position open
Blank······ Vertically type
(ON side of breaker is upper)
Y············ Horizontally type
(ON side of breaker is left)
Z············ Horizontally type
(ON side of breaker is right)
Blank······ 3 pole and 4 pole
2P··········· 2 pole
NV·········· NV type for 400 to 800 A frame
Blank······ The other
10··········· NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW,
NF1600-SEW/SDW
SW indicate WSS
Blank······ 2 pole and 3 pole
4P·········· 4 pole
1······· NF125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-CW/SW/HW/RW
2······· NF160-SW/HW,NF250-CW/SW/HW,
NV250-CW/SW/SEW/HW/HEW/RW
2G···· NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
NF160-SGW/HGW,
NF250-/SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
4······· NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW,
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
8······· NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW,
NV800-SEW/HEW
SW indicate WSS C, S and H series
UW indicate WSS U series
NV·········· NV type for 400 to 630 A frame
Blank······The other
59

5. Terminal Cover
Table 5-28
Large terminal cover
(TC-L)
Small terminal cover
(TC-S)
Transparent terminal
cover (TTC)
Rear terminal cover
(BTC)
Plug-in terminal cover
(PTC)
Breaker type
A
A
A
A
A
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
C
NF30-CS, MB30-CS
2P
TCL-03CS2W
(43.5×30.5×25)
TCS-03CS2W
(43.5×30.5×5)
TTC-03CS2
(43.5×30.5×25)
BTC-03CS2W
(43.5×30.5×6.5)
—
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS
3P
TCL-03CS3W
(67×30.5×25)
TCS-03CS3W
(67×30.5×5)
TTC-03CS3
(67×30.5×25)
BTC-03CS3W
(67×30.5×6.5)
—
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
2P
(Note 1)
TCL-05SW2W
(50×65.5×25)
(Note 1)
TCS-05SW2W
(50×65.5×5)
(Note 1)
TTC-05SW2
(50×65.5×25)
BTC-05SW2W
(50×65.5×5)
PTC-05SW2W
(50×65.5×6.5)
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW
MB50-CW/SW
NF125-CW/SW/HW
3P
2P
IP20
(Note 2)
TCL-05SW3W
(75×65.5×25)
(Note 1)
TCL-1SW2W
(60×65.5×40)
(Note 2)
TCS-05SW3W
(75×65.5×5)
(Note 1)
TCS-1SW2W
(60×65.5×6.5)
(Note 2)
TTC-05SW3
(75×65.5×25)
(Note 1)
TTC-1SW2
(60×65.5×40)
BTC-05SW3W
(75×65.5×5)
BTC-1SW2W
(60×65.5×6.5)
PTC-05SW3W
(75×65.5×6.5)
PTC-1SW2W
(60×65.5×6.5)
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW,
NV125-RW, MB100-SW
3P
(Note 2)
TCL-1SW3W
(90×65.5×40)
(Note 2)
TCS-1SW3W
(90×65.5×6.5)
(Note 2)
TTC-1SW3
(90×65.5×40)
BTC-1SW3W
(90×65.5×6.5)
PTC-1SW3W
(90×65.5×6.5)
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW,
NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW, NV250-RW
MB225-SW
2P
3P
(Note 2)
TCL-2SW3W
(105×65.5×40)
(Note 2)
TCS-2SW3W
(105×65.5×6.5)
(Note 2)
TTC-2SW3
(105×65.5×40)
BTC-2SW3W
(105×65.5×6.5)
PTC-2SW3W
(105×65.5×6.5)
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW
NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
2P
3P
IP40
TCL-2GSW3W
(105×84×40)
TCS-2GSW3W
(105×84×6.5)
TTC-2GSW3
(105×84×40)
BTC-2GSW3W
(105×84×6.5)
PTC-2GSW3W
(105×84×6.5)
Notes: (1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of model designation for models with F-type operating handle. (Those are F-type operating-handle dedicated models,
and screws are used for fixing.)
(2) An F-type operating handle can be installed standardly.
Remarks: (1) Parenthesized numbers denote the outside dimensions (A×B×C in mm).
(2) The terminal cover for a four-pole model can be produced upon request.
Table 5-29
5
Large terminal cover
(TC-L)
Transparent terminal
(TTC)
cover
Rear terminal
(BTC)
cover
Plug-in terminal
(PTC)
cover
Breaker type
A
B
C
Fig.1
A
A
A
A
B
C
Fig.2
B
C
B
C
B
C
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
2P, 3P
TCL-4SW3
✳3
( 171✕99.
5✕ 110)
Fig. 1
TTC-4SW3
( 171✕104.
5✕ 110)
BTC-4SW3
PTC-4SW3
( 140✕99.
5✕
42)
( 140✕99.
5✕ 42)
NF400-UEW
3P
TCL-4SW3✳1
( 171✕132.5/196.
5✕ 110)
—
BTC-4SW3
✳1
( 140✕132.5/196.
5✕ 42)
—
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW, NV400-SEW/HEW
NF630-SW/SEW/HEW, NV630-SEW
4P
TCL-4SW4
( 240✕104.5✕110)
TTC-4SW4
( 240✕104.
5✕ 110)
BTC-4SW4
✳2
( 185✕97.
5✕ 39)
—
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW, NV800-SEW/HEW
2P, 3P
TCL-8SW3
( 224✕103.5✕155)
TTC-8SW3
( 224✕103.
5✕ 155)
BTC-8SW3
✳2
( 210✕97.
5✕ 32)
—
NF800-UEW
3P
TCL-8UW3
✳1
( 220✕146/194.
5✕ 155)
—
BTC-8SW3
✳ 1,
✳2
( 210✕146/194.
5✕ 32)
—
TCL-8SW4
NF800-SEW/HEW 4P
Fig. 2
( 294✕103.5✕155)
TTC-8SW4
( 294✕103.
5✕ 155)
BTC-8SW4
✳2
( 280✕97.
5✕ 32)
—
NF400-UEW, NF800-UEW
4P
TCL-8UW4
✳1
( 290✕146/194.
5✕ 155)
—
BTC-8SW4
✳ 1,
✳2
( 280✕146/194.
5✕ 32)
—
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW/SDW
2P, 3P
TCL-10SW3
( 220✕139✕150)
—
—
—
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW/SDW
4P
TCL-10SW4
( 290✕139✕150)
—
—
—
Remarks:
1. ( ) Shows external dimensions in mm. (A✕B✕ C)
✳ 1. Line side/Load side
✳ 2. These covers can be mounted on plug-in type.
✳ 3. Except for NF400/630-HEW/REW and NV400/630-HEW/REW.
60

5. Accessories
External Accessories
6. Electrical Operation Device
● 250A Frame and less
Table 5-30: Summary of Model Designations
Rated operating
voltage
Applicable models
(Note 1)
NF125-CW(3P)
NF125-SW(3P, 4P)
NF125-HW
NF160-SW/HW
NF250-CW/SW/HW
MB225-SW
NF125-SGW/HGW
NF160-SGW/HGW
NF250-SGW/HGW
NV125-CW/SW/HW NV250-CW/SW/HW NV250-SEW/HEW
24V DC MDSD024-NF1SWE MDSD024-NF2SWE MDSD024-NF2GSWE MDSD024-NV1SWE MDSD024-NV2SWE MDSD024-NVE2SWE
48-60V DC MDSD060-NF1SWE MDSD060-NF2SWE MDSD060-NF2GSWE MDSD060-NV1SWE MDSD060-NV2SWE MDSD060-NVE2SWE
Compatible to 100-240V
AC/100-250V DC
MDSAD240-NF1SWE MDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD240-NF2GSWE MDSAD240-NV1SWE MDSAD240-NV2SWE MDSAD240-NVE2SWE
● 400A Frame and more
Table 5-31: Specifications
Rated operating voltage
(Allowable voltage range 85~110%)
Control circuit
voltage
Uc
ON
P1
P2
S1
S2
S4
OFF
(RESET)
ALa
ALc
MDS Module
Breaker alarm switch (AL)
(for small current)
P.S
Power
Supply
X
L2
MDS Base
K1
SW1
K2
K2
K1
K3
M
L1
SW2
This refers to the status in which the circuit breaker
and the electrical operation device is OFF.
K3
K2
K1
K3
P.S
SW1
SW2
M
K1
K2
K3
X
L1
L2
Switching power supply
(except for 24VDC model)
MANUAL/AUTO switch
Limit switch (for spring condition
detection Charge/Discharge)
Motor
Relay(for Charge/OFF operation)
Relay(for motor)
Relay(for motor)
Pumping prevention circuit
Power LED indicator (red)
Trip LED indicator (yellow)
24V DC
Control circuit
voltage
Uc
ON
P.S
SW1
SW2
M
K1
K2
K3
X
48-60VDC
ON action 0.05–0.1
Operating time (s) OFF action
0.6 or less
Charging action
1.2 or less
Power requirement (VA) 150
Note: (1) Place an order of other models in conjunction with the circuit breaker.
Remarks: (1) The standard terminal cover can be used.
(2) Please contact us for details of the outside dimensions.
MDSD024 -NF2SWE MDSD024 -NV2SWE/NVE2SWE
MDSD060 -NF2SWE MDSD060 -NV2SWE/NVE2SWE
MDSAD240-NF2SWE MDSAD240-NV2SWE/NVE2SWE
others
P1
P2
S1
S2
MDS Module
P.S
Power
Supply
X
Switching power supply
(except for 24VDC model)
MANUAL/AUTO switch
Limit switch (for spring condition
detection Charge/Discharge)
Motor
Relay(for Charge/OFF operation)
Relay(for motor)
Relay(for motor)
Pumping prevention circuit
Compatible to
100-240V AC/100-250V DC
MDS Base
K3
M
S4
OFF
K1
(RESET) Breaker is OFF condition and MDS is charge condition
K1
SW1
K2
K2
K1
SW2
K3
K3
K2
Motor-drive type (2)
(MD)
Spring-charged type
(MDS)
Table 5-32
MCCB
type
ELCB
type
NF-C series
NF-S·H series
NF-U, MB series
NV-C series
NV-S·H series
MN series
Electrical operation system
Rated operating voltage (V)
(Allowable voltage range
85~110%)
✳1
NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-SW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-SEW/HEW/REW
NF400-UEW NF800-UEW
NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV400-SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
—
Motor-drive type (2)
—
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1250-SDW
NF1600-SEW
NF1600-SDW
—
—
—
—
Motor-drive type (2)
NF400-CW NF630-CW NF800-CEW
NF400-SW
NF400-SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-SW
NF630-SEW/HEW/REW
NF800-SEW/HEW/REW
NF400-UEW NF800-UEW
NV400-CW NV630-CW
NV400-SW
NV400-SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-SEW/HEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
—
Spring-charged type
100/110VDC, 100/110VAC, 200/220VAC
(125VDC, 240VAC)
OFF
ON
OFF
—
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
NF1250-SDW
NF1600-SEW
NF1600-SDW
—
—
—
—
Spring-charged type
ON
61
Operating
current
( A, rms) ✳2
DC
AC
O perating time (s)
100/110V
100/110V
200/220V
On
0.05
Less than 0.3 (self-holding)
Less than 0.3 (self-holding)
O ff
Less than 3 (self-holding)
R equired transformer capacity
(VA )
400
700
700
700
Endurance voltage (V)
3.0 (8.0)
4.0 (8.0)
2.0 (4.5)
4.0 (8.0)
5.0 (10.0)
3.5 (7.0)
✳ 1. ( ) voltages are special options and might require an external resistor. For details, consult your dealer .
✳ 2. ( ) shows starting currents.
1500
1.0 (3.0)
1.0 (3.0)
0.5 (1.5)
8
10
8
1.0 (3.0)
1.0 (3.0)
0.5 (1.5)
0.07
9
10
8
Less than 3 (self-holding)

General precautions for motor-operated electrical MCCBs
● Motor-operated types have intermittent ratings, and therefore they
should not be operated more than 10 times consecutively (one
on/off counts as an operation).
● The operating voltage should be between 85~110% of the rated
control voltage.
● When the breaker is tripped by trip button or breakdown (i.e.,
overload or short circuit), the breaker will not show that it has been
tripped (except for motor-operated type 1 breakers).
● The dielectric strength of the electrical operating circuits is 1500V.
When performing a dielectric strength test simultaneously with
another device at a voltage over 1500V, the operating circuit
terminal should be disconnected.
Electrically Operated MCCBs and ELCBs
Motor-operated type (2)
● Electrical operation
Forward and reverse motor rotation is changed by ball screw to
switch the breaker ON and OFF (reset).
● Manual operation
The manual operation handle can be used to switch the breaker ON
and OFF directly.
● Cautions during electrical operation
1. In case the UVT operates and a circuit breaker trips if the breaker
has a UVT, the re-closing procedure may differ according to the
state of the breaker before tripping.
When the circuit breaker trips while turned ON..... Reset (OFF) ->
Turn ON
When the circuit breaker trips while turned OFF..... Turn ON (idle
tripping) -> Reset (OFF) -> Turn ON
(If it fails to turn ON (idle tripping), please operate Reset (OFF) and
turn ON.)
2. Do not send ON and OFF signals consecutively. An interval of at
least 0.5s is required between each ON and OFF.
3. For models with auto reset capability, resetting after an NFB trip
should be performed after an interval of 0.5s.
Automatic Reset
● If the breaker is an auto reset type, it contains a built-in alarm
switch and the off-control circuit closes when the breaker is tripped.
Since the breaker automatically resets itself after tripping, the
power is easily restored by switching on the breaker again. With a
UVT mounted, however, auto reset may not be possible. In this
case, please consult your dealer.
4. The electrical operating device is equipped with a pumping
prevention circuit. Although it is possible to set the device to OFF
while it is set to ON, it is impossible to return it to ON immediately.
To return to ON, first shut off the ON switch, then set it back to ON.
5. Special care is required during electrical operation because the
manual operation handle moves at high speed. Also be sure to turn
off the circuit power supply when using manual operation.
6. With manual operation, ensure that the handle is fully extended.
Manual operation
Internal structure
5
Control circuit
The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automaticreset
type.
(1) Control circuit 1.
(400,630 and 800AF)
breaker is OFF state
(2) Control circuit 2.
(NF1000-SEW to NF 1600-SEW)
Earth terminal
Earth terminal
(DC-)P2
Operational
power supply
ON
P1
S2
OFF
RESET S4
T1
T2
Y
Y
X
Z
Z
T1
X
Y
X
T1
Y
LS
X
Y
Y
X
Z
M
(DC-)P2
Operational
power supply
P1
ON
S2
OFF
RESET S4
Z
T1
T2
Y
T1
X
Y
X
Y
X
Y
Z
X
Y
Y
X
X
Z
M
LS
Z
ALa
95
T2
ALa
95
T2
M :Motor
X :Relay for ON operation
Y :Relay for OFF operation
Z :Relay for changing Motor polarity
T1 :Timer for antipumping
T2 :Timer for automatic reset
LS :Limit Switch
ALa :Alarm switch for automatic reset (a contact)
62

5. Accessories
External Accessories
Spring-charged type
● Electrical operation
When the ON switch is closed, the coil is excited to release the
latch mechanism and the force of the closing spring turns the
breaker ON instantly.
When the OFF switch is closed, a relay starts the motor which turns
the breaker OFF and charges the spring simultaneously.
● Manual operation
Pressing the ON button will release the latch mechanism and the
force of the closing spring turns the breaker ON instantly.
Pressing the leaf spring, pulling out the manual handle and pumping
it back and forth over 10 times will turn the breaker OFF and charge
the spring at the same time.
● Cautions during electrical operation
Whenever an electrical operation device is to be installed in or
removed from the breaker, the breaker must be tripped and the
device discharged.
Pushing the TRIP button on an MCCB with an electrical-operation
device installed will not trip the breaker in the OFF state. This does
not mean the breaker is faulty.
Switching OFF a breaker with an electrical-operation device
installed will take 3s. If instant opening is required, install an SHT or
UVT to the breaker.
● The breaker contains a built-in pumping-prevention relay.
Internal structure
Control circuit
The dotted line shows an additional connection for the automaticreset
type.
(DC-)
P2
Operational
power supply
Internal connection
Earth terminal
X
M
LS3
CC.....Coil for making
Y.....Relay for pumping prevention
X.....Relay for self-sustaining on OFF side
LS1...Limit switch interlocking with cam
LS2...Limit switch interlocking with cam
LS3...Limit switch interlocking with OFF lock plate
M....Motor
P1
X
X
LS2
ON
OFF
RESET
S2
S4
Y
LS1
Y
Y
CC
Ala
Alarm switch for automatic resetting (contact a)
63

8
8
Dimensions
Front connection
● NF125-CW, NF125-SW, NF125-HW
Insulation barrier
(removable) OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated
Display hole
(ON/OFF/TRIP)
Manual handle
Operating circuit
terminal board
(M3.5 screw)
Operating circuit
terminal cover
(standard supply)
Power supply module
M8 screw 24
Circuit breaker
Center of the electrically operated
Automatic/
manual
selection
switch
ON button
Trip button
P1P2 S1S2S4
P1P2 S1S2S4
111
130 50
86 45
41
78
39
60
30
86
86
Front plate
90 90
Display hole
90
(Charge/Discharge)
120
25
158
163
61
30 30
M4x0.7 screw
or ø5
3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole
110–111
R1
88
Font-plate cut out
40
80
ø8.5
max. 19
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Remarks:
The 2-pole models are 3-pole models
with the central pole removed.
The three-pole type only is available
for the model NF125-CW, and the
3-pole and 4-pole types only are
available for the model NF125-SW.
● NF160-SW, NF160-HW, NF250-CW, NF250-SW, NF250-HW, MB225-SW
MANUAL/AUTO
switch
Alarm switch AL
(micro loads use)
ON button
OPEN(TRIP)
button
● NF125-SGW, NF125-HGW, NF160-SGW, NF160-HGW, NF250-SGW, NF250-HGW
Automatic/
manual
selection
switch
ON button
Trip button
Insulating barrier
(removable)
P1
P2
Insulation barrier
(removable)
P1 P2
70
86
90
105
Electrical operation device
Power supply indicator LED(Red)
OFFlock
plate
S1 S2 S4
70
86
90
105
OFF lock plate
Display hole
(ON/OFF/TRIP)
S1 S2 S4
TRIP indicator
LED(Yellow)
Breaker condition's
indicator
(ON/OFF)
Manual handle
P1
P2
Center of the electrically operated
P1 P2
S1
86
90
S2
35
S4
105
140
S1 S2 S4
35
86
90
105
140
Center of MDS
Control circuit terminal
Mounting screw
(M3 tapping screw)
144
165 100
144
50 165
50
Manual handle
100
Operating circuit
terminal board
(M3.5 screw)
86 45
37
78
35
Front plate
Display hole
(Charge/Discharge)
Control circuit terminal
(M3.5 screw)
Control circuit
terminal cover
45
86
33
78
31
MDS base
Front panel
MDS Module
Operating circuit
terminal cover
(standard supply)
Power supply
M8 bolt (Hex-soket)
module
24
176
181
11.5
Hex.socket head
M8 bolt
15.5
Terminal block
for alarm switch AL
connection
(M4 screw)
(with terminal cover)
158
163
61
79
24
35
3-pole
35 35
3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
Circuit breaker
Drilling plan
35
4-pole
4-pole
126
M4X0.7 screw
or 5mm-dia. hole
126
M4x0.7 screw
or ø5
Center of MDS
88
Font-plate cut out
Center of the electrically operated
88
R1
R1
Font-plate cut out
32
80
32
80
ø8.5
10
max. 24
(Bus t max=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection
ø8.5
10
max. 24
(Conductor thickness
t=7 max.)
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used
for the LED display for a trip
indicator check.
2.2-pole breakers are 3-pole
breakers with the central pole
removed.
3.NF250-CW is available in 2-and
3-pole only.
MB225-SW is available in 3-
pole only.
5
● NV125-CW, NV125-SW, NV125-HW
Insulation barrier
(removable)
OFF lock plate Center of the electrically operated
Display hole
(ON/OFF/TRIP)
Manual handle
Operating circuit
terminal board
(M3.5 screw)
Operating circuit
terminal cover
(standard supply)
Power supply
module
M8 screw
24
Circuit breaker
Center of the electrically operated
Automatic/
manual
selection
switch
ON button
Trip button
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
60
86
90
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
30
86
90
90
120
111
130 50
86 45
41
78
39
Display hole Front plate
(Charge/Discharge)
Test button
25
158
163
61
30 30
3-pole Drilling plan 4-pole
110–111
M4x0.7 screw
or ø5
88
R1
Font-plate cut out
40
80
ø8.5
max.19
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
● NV250-SEW, NV250-HEW
Insulating barrier Electrical operation device
(removable) Power supply indicator LED(Red)
OFFlock TRIP indicator
MANUAL/AUTO plate LED(Yellow)
switch
Breaker condition's
Alarm switch AL
indicator
(micro loads use)
(ON/OFF)
ON button
OPEN(TRIP)
button
P1
P2
S1
70
86
90
105
S2
S4
P1
P2
S1
86
90
S2
35
S4
105
140
Center of MDS
Control circuit terminal
Mounting screw
(M3 tapping screw)
Manual handle
144
165 100
100
Test button
Control circuit terminal
(M3.5 screw)
Control circuit
terminal cover
45
86
33
78
MDS base
31
Front panel
MDS Module
15.5
Terminal block
for alarm switch AL
connection
(M4 screw)
(with terminal cover)
158
163
Hex.socket head
M8 bolt
61
24
35
3-pole
Breaker
Drilling plan
126
35
M4X0.7 screw
or 5mm-dia. hole
4-pole
Center of MDS
R1
88
Font-plate cut out
32
80
ø8.5
10
max. 24
(Bus t max=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection
Note.1.One AL(micro loads use)is used
for the LED display for a trip
indicator check.
2.4-pole breakers are only
NV250-SEW.
64

5. Accessories
External Accessories
Front connection
● NF400-CW, NF400-SW, NF400-SEW, NF400-HEW, NF400-REW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation device
231
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier
device and breaker
Breaker
Center line of breaker
110
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44
Operating circuit terminal
8
block M3.5 screw
Breaker
120
70
257
277
194
44
Trip button
112
140
231
2, 3-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
ø14
M12 bolt
● NF400-UEW (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)
4-pole
16
43
22 28
56
168
185
196
44
94.5
195
255
44
M6
44
tap or ø7
2, 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Center line of electrical operation device and breaker
Insulating barrier
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Breaker
Operating circuit terminal block
Center line of breaker
M3.5 screw
Center line of electrical operation device
277
120
70
20
Trip button
44
28
112
140
231
16
43 43
110 297
110
ø14
M12 bolt
Drilling plan
● NV400-CW, NV400-SW, NV400-SEW, NV400-HEW, NV400-REW Motor drive type (2)
257
ø12.5
ø12.5
127.5
78
8
156
ø7
141
191.5
292
352
ø7
47
44
Breaker
234
M6 tap or Ø7
Center line of electrical operation device
231
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier
device and breaker
Breaker
Center line of breaker
110
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Operating circuit terminal
block M3.5 screw
44
8
Breaker
● NF630-CW, NF630-SW, NF630-SEW, NF630-HEW, NF630-REW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation device
231
Center line of electrical operation Insulating barrier
device and breaker
Breaker
Center line of breaker
Operating circuit terminal
block M3.5 screw
120
70
257
277
194
120
70
257
277
194
Trip button
44
112
140
231
2, 3-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
ø14
M12 bolt
4-pole
16
43
22 28
56
168
185
196
44
94.5
195
255
44
M6
44
tap or ø7
2, 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
110
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
44
8
Breaker
44
Trip button
112
140
231
2, 3-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
ø14
M12 bolt
4-pole
16
43
22 28
56
168
185
196
44
94.5
195
255
44
M6
44
tap or ø7
2, 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
65

Front connection
● NF400-UEW 4-pole Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical
operation device
Insulating barrier
Breaker
Center line of
breaker
35
Center line of breaker
ø14
M12 bolt
16
48
110
Conductor
thickness
t=8 max.
ø14
143
97
6.5
ø7
15
120
70
23.5
Center line of
electrical operation device
322
48
275
ø14
112
ø7
140
290
Trip button
35
70
210
280
231
Neutral pole
Operating circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
6.5
141
191.5
292
352
Drilling plan
● NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-SEW, NV630-HEW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation
device and breaker
120
70
Trip button
● NF800-CEW, NF800-SDW, NF800-SEW, NF800-HEW, NF800-REW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation device
Center line of electrical operation
Insulating barrier
device and breaker
44
Center line of electrical operation device
Insulating barrier
231
112
140
231
3-pole
Breaker
Breaker
Test button
ø14
M12 bolt
22 28
56
168
185
196
4-pole
Center line of breaker
Operating circuit terminal
block M3.5 screw Conductor
thickness
t=12 max.
110
Center line of breaker
16
43 257 110
277
Conductor thickness t=8 max. 44
8
Operating circuit
terminal block M3.5 screw
46
8
94.5
195
255
44
44
3-pole
Breaker
M6
tap or ø7
Breaker
44
Drilling plan
4-pole
5
120
70
275
277
194
243
Trip button
2, 3-pole
4-pole
Remark: 2 pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
44
140
210
231
35 40
70
210
280
231
● NF800-UEW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation
device and breaker
Center line of breaker
Center line of electrical
operation device
32 8
15
87
ø14
M12 bolt
Center line of electrica
Center line of breaker
operation device
40
Insulating barrier
14
Breaker
8 32 15
87
110
Neutral
pole
Conductor thickness
t=8 max.
ø14
46
94.5
195
255
143
64
8
ø7
15
70
M6 tap
70
or ø7
2, 3-pole 4-pole
Drilling plan
Breaker
120
70
23.5
44
277
322
275
ø14
112
ø7
290
290
Trip button
140
210
231
3-pole
ø14
M12 bolt
35
70
210
280
231
4-pole
87
Neutral pole
Operating circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
8
143
191.5
292
352
70
M6 tap
140
or ø7
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
66

5. Accessories
External Accessories
Front connection
● NV800-SEW, NV800-HEW Motor drive type (2)
Center line of electrical operation
device and breaker
120
70 110
Trip button
44
14
40
140
210
231
3-pole
Insulating barrier
Breaker
32 8
15
275 87
87
ø14
M12 bolt
Operating circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
Test button
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
● NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW, NF1250-SDW Motor drive type (2)
406 110
120
61
280(4-pole)
210(4-pole)
70
277
Center line of
4-pole model
Conductor thickness
t=8×2 max. 55
Insulating barrier
15
Bolt max.
Operating circuit M12×50
terminal block
M3.5 screw
46
8
46
94.5
195
255
Breaker
70
M6 tap
or ø7
3-pole
Drilling plan
Breaker
243
375
80
32 8
15
ø13
M12 bolt
13
44
43
140
210(3-pole)
Neutral pole
Center line of electrical
operation device and
3-pole model
59
140
231
290
● NF1600-SEW, NF1600-SDW Motor drive type (2)
70
70
M8 screw
or ø10
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
(185.5)
60
38
ø11
38 15
(185.5)
Conductor thickness
t=6×width 75 max.
Bolt max.
M10×65
55
20
Breaker
61
120
44
210
203
263
Operating circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
Center line of electrical
operation device
115
210
280
35
101.5
304.5
364.5
130 406
Neutral pole
140
231
290
69.5
70
70
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
M8 screw
or ø10
375
67

Rear connection
● NF1600-SEW (3-pole) Motor drive type (2)
Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated 90°
M3.5 screw Connection Conductor thickness
allowance t=6×width 75 max.
15
18.5
20
109
Mounting angle
Breaker
over 160
269
120
61
44
406
ø17.5
ø9.5
38 15
273
under
100
81.5
140 231
125 38
210
290 200
● NF1600-SEW (4-pole) Motor drive type (2)
38
60
36
15
ø11
M10×50 bolt
212
3-pole
70
Drilling plan
M8 tap
or ø10
210
35
Operating circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
Mounting angle
Stud can be rotated 90°
Connection
allowance Conductor thickness
15 t=6×width 75 max.
18.5
Mounting angle
Breaker
120
61
44
406
ø17.5
ø9.5
109
20
273
under 100
81.5 over 160
269
Center line of electrical
operation device
70
210
280
20
231
290 125
54 18
ø11
M10×50 bolt
38 18
60
106 106
318
4-pole
38
15
70
M8 tap
or ø10
Drilling plan
5
● NF1600-SDW Motor drive type (2)
Operating circuit terminal block Mounting angle Stud can be rotated 90°
M3.5 screw Connection
allowance
Conductor thickness
t=6×width 75 max.
18.5
15
20
109
Mounting angle
Breaker
over 160
120
61
44
406
ø17.5
36
38 15
38
60
233
over 175
375
140 231
210
290 200
ø9.5
125 38
ø11
15
M10×50 bolt
212
3-pole
70
Drilling plan
M8 tap
or ø10
● NF1600-SDW (4-pole) Motor drive type (2)
210
35
Operating circuit
terminal block
M3.5 screw
Mounting angle Stud is in horizontal direction.
Stud can not be rotated 90°.
Connection
allowance
Conductor thickness
15 t=6×width 75 max.
18.5
Mounting angle
Breaker
120
61
406
109
20
233
over 160
375
ø17.5
ø9.5
44
38
over 175
Center line of electrical
operation device
70
210
280
231
290 125
38 18
60
ø11
M10×50 bolt
106 106
318
4-pole
15
70
M8 tap
or ø10
Drilling plan
68

5. Accessories
External Accessories
7. Mechanical Interlocks (MI)
Table 5-33
● Outside Dimension Diagram
(Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in)
33
Number
Panel mouting
Direct mount on
Applicable models
of poles Front connection, Rear connection, Plug-in Dimension A mm circuit breaker
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
2P
47.5
–
MI-05SW3
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW 3P –
MI-05SWFB3
NF63-SW/HW 4P MI-05SW4 –
NF125-CW/SW/HW
2P
45
–
MI-05SW3
3P
MI-1SWFB3
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW, NV125-RW
4P
MI-1SW4 –
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-SEW/HEW,
MB225-SW, NV250-RW
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-SW/HW, NV250-SW/HW/SEW/HEW
NF125-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/RGW/UGW
NF125-SGW/HGW/UGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW/UGW
44
13
70
15
● Front, Rear, Plug-in
22
Stroke
1.5
Center of mechanical
interlock
Center of circuit
breaker
Panel plate thickness
(t1~3.2)
(Gap between the circuit breaker and the panel)
Front, Rear, Plug-in (panel mounting)
● Drilling Dimension Diagram
(Front connection, Rear connection, and Plug-in)
4ø (ø5.5 and ø7.5 countersunk (rear) (Note 1) );
use M5×0.8 flat countersunk head screws to fix.
31
15.5
50
2P
3P
4P
3P
4P
A
120 (Note 2)
63 (Note 3)
MI-05SW3
MI-2SW4
MI-05SW3
MI-2SW4
Machine this part according to
the front plate drilling dimensions
of the main breaker.
Center of mechanical
interlock
Center of circuit
breaker
With two breakers, use a panel-mounted mechanical interlock for one-way only input.
A breaker-mounting mechanical to mount on the breaker main unit can be made to order. Consult your
dealer for more details.
Notes: (1) When the panel plate thickness is
2.3 or more, prepare four holes
(ø5.5 and ø9.5 countersunk (rear)).
(2) These are standard dimensions for
2- and 3-pole models, but can be
altered upon request.
(3) The U series have different
dimensions.
Please contact us for details.
Remarks: (1) Please contact us for outside
dimensions of other models of
different specifications.
(2) These are not isolation-compatible.
Mechanical interlock
–
MI-2SWFB3
–
MI-2GSWFB3
–
Breaker mounting (front)
Type
F G P
MI-4SWFB3
44
194
190
MI-8SWFB3
70
243
260
E
44
70
22
Mechanical
interlock
22(30)
44(55)
70(100)
Mechanical
interlock
Breaker
Breaker
Breaker
B
Mounts to 4-5.5mm-dia hole,
7.5mm-dia countersunk (rear)*2
31
15.5
50
A
Stroke
External dimensions
C
Panel thickness
(t1~3.2mm)
Gap between panel
and breaker
Differs with main
breaker unit drilling plan.
Mechanical
interlock
B
31(40)
15.5(20)
A
Stroke
C
Panel thickness
(t1.6~3.2mm)
1.5
Gap between panel
and breaker
External dimensions
Mounts to 4-5.5mm-dia hole,
7.5mm-dia countersunk (rear)*2
Differs with main
breaker unit drilling plan.
Mechanical
interlock
Breaker
94.5 45
Mechanical terminal mount
P
47.5 Stroke
External dimensions
Breaker
G
D
P
Mechanical interlock
Breaker
50(80)
P
( ) dimension are shown for NF1600-SS·NF1600-SSD
Drilling plan
Drilling plan
Drilling plan(breaker mount)
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3
S1. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t=1.6~3.2mm.
S2. When the panel thickness is greater than t=2.3mm, use 4-5.5mm-dia 9.5mm dia countersunk (rear).
✳1 . Specify
the breaker mounting pitch (P)
✳ 2. No need to specify the panel thickness (t). (Usable panel thickness range: t=1~3.2mm. Above 400AF, use panel thickness t=1.6~3.2mm. )
✳3 . For isolation purposes with 400/630/800AF models, keep the C dimension deviation within
± 1mm.
✳ 4. Enquire for more details .
F
P
F
M6 screws
or 7mm-dia
● Table of Altered Dimensions
Table 5-34
B reaker type
Pitch (P) ✳1
Dimensions (mm)
Breaker mount
(✳4)
MCCB
ELCB
Special
Standard
Standard
Type
Standard
C
t A B D E Fig.
Type
2P
3P
3P
Type
4P
(✳3)
3P
NF400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV400-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
190
83.5
MI-4SWFB3
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW MI-4SW3
– 210
MI-4SW4
250
47.5
33
– 74
NF400-UEW(3P) – – 190
(✳ 2)
63.
5
–
Fig.1
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW NV800-SEW/HEW
220
–
83.5
MI-8SWFB3
MI-8SW3
240 – MI-8SW4 290 47.5 33 – 74
NF400-UEW(4P), NF800-UEW
–
– 220
60
–
NF1000-SEW, NF1250-SEW/SDW
–
M-10SW3 220 – – MI-10SW4 290 47.5 47 37.5 – –
–
2.3
Fig.2
NF1600-SEW/SDW
–
M-16SW3 315 – – MI-16SW4 426 65 54.5
39
– –
–
Fig.
Fig.3
–
–
69

8. Handle Lock Devices and Card Holder
Table 5-35
Description Lock cover (LC) Handle lock (HL) Handle lock (HL-S) (Note 2) OFF Lock with 3 Padlock Card holder
Appearance
NF30-CS, MB30-CS
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
2P
3P
2P
LC-03CS
HL-05FH
(Note 1)
—
HLS-05SW2P
—
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW, NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW
MB30-SW, MB50-CW/SW
3P
LC-05SW
HLF-05SW
HLN-05SW
HLS-05SW
NF63-SW/HW
NF125-CW/SW
NF125-HW
NF125-CW/SW/HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW
MB100-SW, NV125-RW
4P
2P
2P
3P
LC-1SW
HLF-1SW
HLN-1SW
(Note 1)
HLS-1SW2P
HLS-1SW
—
CH-P No.5
NF125-SW/HW, NV125-SW/HW
4P
NF160-SW/HW, NF250-CW/SW/HW, NV250-CW/SW/HW
NV250-SEW/HEW, MB225-SW
NV250-RW
2P
3P
4P
LC-2SW
HLF-2SW
HLN-2SW
(Note 1)
HLS-2SW
NF125-SGW/HGW, NF160-SGW/HGW, NF250-SGW/HGW
NF125-RGW/UGW, NF250-RGW/UGW
3P, 4P LC-2GSW
HLF-2GSW (Note 1)
HLN-2GSW
HLS-2GSW
HLF3-2GSW
Notes: (1) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(2) HL-S types are used for OFF-lock.
Remark: (1) Users are requested to prepare padlocks for HL and HL-S types. (25mm padlock for HL, and 35mm padlock for HL-S.)
Table 5-36
P roduct
H andle (HT)
H andle lock (HL)
Handle lock (HL-S )
Card holder
5
Breaker type
NF400-CW, NV400-CW
NF400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV400-SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NF630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW/REW
NV630-CW/SW/SEW/HEW
NF400-UEW (3P)
NF400-UEW (4P)
NF800-CEW/SDW/SEW/HEW/REW/UEW
NV800-SEW/HEW
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW/SDW
NF1600-SEW/SDW
HT-4CW
HL-4CW (✳1·2)
HT-4SW
HL-4SW (✳1·2)
HT-10SW
HL (✳1)
HLS-4SW (✳1)
HLS-4UW (✳1)
HLS-8SW (✳1)
HLS-8UW (✳3)
Remarks:
1 . Padlocks for HL and HL-S must be provided by the customer.
✳1. Must be ordered with breaker.
✳2. The HL without padlock can be used as a lock cover (LC).
✳3. Applicable types are NF400-UEW (4P) and NF800-UEW (3P, 4P).
—
CH-P No.3
9. IEC 35mm Rail Mounting Adapters
Table 5-37
Adapter for
IEC 35mm rail
M4×0.7 screw
Adapter for
IEC 35mm rail
Applicable models Number of poles Parts number Outline
NF30-CS, NV30-CS, MB30-CS
2P, 3P
DIN-03CS
Fig.1
3
6
NF32-SW, NF63-CW/SW/HW
NV32-SW, NV63-CW/SW/HW, MB30-SW
MB50-CW/SW
2P
3P
DIN-05SW
Fig.2
CL
35
100
CL
5
CL
35
Fig.1
Mounting hook
for IEC 35mm rail
Fig.2
4
35
NF125-CW/SW
NF125-HW, NV125-CW/SW/HW, MB100-SW
2P
3P
2P
3P
DIN-1SW2
DIN-1SW3
Fig.3
8
1
7
13
Fig.3
70

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF30-CS
MB30-CS
Series
Frame size 30
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 2
3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 500
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
690V
500V
415V
380V
240V
—
—
1.5/1.5
1.5/1.5
2.5/2
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
NF30-CS
3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30
C series
(2), (3.2), 4, (5),
6.3, (8), 10, 16
2 (for single phase)
MB30-CS
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×20 (2pcs)
Small terminal cover 2pcs Only MB30-CS
1.4, 2.5, 4, 7.1,
10, 16, 25, 32
3
Type NF30-CS
■Operating Characteristics
3h
2h
1h
40min
Types
NF30-CS
MB30-CS
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Operating time
1min
40s
30s
20s
10s
6s
4s
2s
Max.
1s
0.6s
0.4s
Min.
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25
2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
×100% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Temperature Characteristics
Left-side
mounting
2-pole
3-pole
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
Lead wire
direction
Operating time
change rate (%)
300
250
200
150
100
80
70
–10
0
10
20
30
Rated ambient
40
50
60
Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be
produced upon request.
(2) refer to page 44.
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
Small
Large
Rear
Skeleton
Handle lock
Lock cover
Rail mounting adapters
Terminal cover
(TC-S) TCS-03CS3W (*1)
(TC-L) TCL-03CS3W (*1)
(BTC) BTC-03CS3W (*1)
(TTC) TTC-03CS (*1)
(HL) HL-05FH
(LC) LC03CS
(DIN) DIN-03CS
60
70
70
70
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
71

Front connection
Mtg. hole
M5 screw
14.5
Applicable
wire size:1.6mm-dia.
to 14mm 2
M4 × 0.7 taps or ø5
Breaker
76.5
ø8.5
96
ø5
6
64
54
84
ø5.5
23.5
45
2-pole
47
67.5
3-pole
3
28
49
52
67
10
12.5 (max.)
Bus t max. =3
Bus drilling for
direct connection
23.5
2-pole
3-pole
Drilling plan
Rear connection
3-pole
Mtg plate t max. =3.2
M4 × 0.7 taps
or ø5
Breaker
2-pole
Breaker
R2
18
76.5
45 (min)
38.5
58.5
25 (min)
5
76.5
84
20
23.5
23.5
ø14
20
55
Insulating tube
8
Breaker mtg
M6 screw
M4 × 0.7 screw
2-pole
3-pole
2-pole 3-pole Drilling plan
47
Front-plate cutout
1mm clearance on
each side of handle
IEC Rail Mounting Adapter
35mm IEC-rail adapter
for installation
5
35
100
6
31
4
2-pole
Installation utensil
for 35mm IEC-rail
3-pole
52
55
58
70
72

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF32-SW
NF63-SW
MB30-SW
MB50-SW
NF63-CW
NF63-HW
MB50-CW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
2 ∗1 Number of poles 3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600
IEC 60947-2 AC
690V
500V
440V
–
2.5/1
2.5/1
(Icu/Ics)
400V
230V
5/2
7.5/4
DC 250V 2.5/1 –
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
NF32-SW
3 4 (5) 6 10
(15) 16 20 25
(30) 32
NF63-CW
3 4 (5) 6 10 (15)
16 20 25 (30) 32
40 50 (60) 63
✽1: Types of DC specifications can be produced upon request.
NF63-SW
3 4 (5) 6 10 (15)
16 20 25 (30) 32
40 50 (60) 63
2 ∗1 3 2 ∗1 3 4
600
–
2.5/1
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
600
–
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
2.5/1 – 7.5/4 –
NF63-HW
10 (15) 16 20
25 (30) 32 40
50 (60) 63
2 ∗1 3 4
690
2.5/1
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
25/13
7.5/4 –
MB30-SW
0.8 1.2 1.4
2 2.5 4 5
7.1 8 10 12
16 25 32
3
500
–
–
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
–
MB50-CW
8 10 12
16 25 32
40 45
3
500
–
–
2.5/1
5/2
7.5/4
–
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
(Note)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Note: These are supplied with NF63-SW, NF63-HW, and MB50-SW models.
MB50-SW
0.8 1.2
1.4 2 2.5
4 5 7.1
3
500
–
–
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
–
Type NF63-SW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
AC use
Types
NF32-SW
NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
DC use
Types
NF32-SW
NF63-CW NF63-SW NF63-HW
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
AC use
Types
MB30-SW
MB50-CW
MB50-SW
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Max.
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Max.
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Max.
2s
1s
Min.
2s
1s
Min.
2s
1s
Min.
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
■Internal Accessories
2-pole
3-pole
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
×100% of Rated current
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Left-side
mounting
AL AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
×100% of Rated current
Breaker handle
Right-side
mounting
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current
■Temperature Characteristics
Operating time
change rate (%)
300
250
200
150
100
80
70
–10
0
10
20
30
Rated ambient
Ambient temperature (°C)
40
50
60
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F
S
V
Type name
F05SW (*1)
S05SW
V05SWF
Reference
page
55
57
54
R — —
LC
(*2)
HL
LC-05SW
HLF-05SW
HLN-05SW
HL-S HLS-05SW (*1)
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Type name
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W (*1)
Large TC-L TCL-05SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-05SW3 (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-05SW3W (*1)
Plug-in PTC PTC-05SW3W (*1)
IEC 35mm rail
mounting adapters
(option)
Reference
page
60
DIN-05SW 70
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
73

Front connection
Mounting hole
Insulation barrier
(removable)
50
M5×0.8 screw
(M6 for 60A and 63A)
24
Applicable
wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm 2
M4×0.7 taps
or 5mm dia.hole
Breaker
111
130
84
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
111
25
Trip button
22
50
25
75
Neutral pole
61
45
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 60A and 63A)
6
25
25
50
75
100
68
12.5 max.
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
4
90
72
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Drilling plan
Rear connection
2-pole
4-pole
Mounting panel
t=3.2max
Insulation tube
M4×0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia.hole
Breaker
3-pole
Breaker
8
8
111
111
R1
52
27
min.
M6 screw
50
M4×0.7 screw
for mounting breaker
25
φ14
25
25
50
70
22.5
68
42
25
50
75
72
2-pole
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
Mounting panel
Plug-in terminal block
M5×0.8
terminal block mounting screw
3
3-pole
80
50
4-pole
105
75
25
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
5.5 15.5
11
83.5
85
180
111
16.5 max.
7
Center line of
breaker body
54
54 80 54
10
Details of terminal
21
89
30
M6 screw
25
55
2-pole
φ6.5
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
25
57 82
2-pole
3-pole
Cutout and drilling plan
50
107
4-pole
6mm-dia.hole or
or M5×0.8 taps
74

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF125-CW
NF125-HW
NF125-SW
MB100-SW
Type name NF125-CW NF125-SW NF125-HW MB100-SW
Rated current In (Amp.)
50 (60) 63 (75)
80 100 125
(15) 16 20 (30)
32 40 50 (60) 63
(75) 80 100 125
(15) 16 20 (30)
32 40 50 (60) 63
(75) 80 100
(12.5) (16) (25)
32 (40) 45 63
71 90 100
Type NF125-SW
Number of poles 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
3
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600
690
690
500
AC
690V
500V
440V
–
7.5/4
10/5
8/4
18/9
25/13
10/5
30/15
50/25
–
–
25/13
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
400V
230V
10/5
30/15
30/15
50/25
50/25
100/50
30/15
50/25
250V 7.5/4 – 15/8 – 40/20 –
–
DC ∗1 400V – 7.5/4 – 15/8 – 40/20
–
500V –
– 15/8 – 40/20 –
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
(Note)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Note: These are supplied with NF125-SW, NF125-HW, and MB100-SW models.
∗1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and
4-pole models for up to 500 V DC.
■Operating Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Min.
Time-delay trip
Tyeps
NF125-CW 50A~100A
NF125-SW 40A~100A
NF125-HW 40A~100A
MB100-SW 40A~100A
Max. (60A~100A)
Max. (40A~50A)
AC
DC
Max. total
breaking
time
Instantaneous trip
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Min.
Time-delay trip
Max.
Tyeps
NF125-SW 16A~20A
NF125-HW 16A~20A
MB100-SW 12.5A~25A
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 506070
AC
DC
Instantaneous trip
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Min.
Tyeps
NF125-CW 125A
NF125-SW 125A
AC
Max.
DC
Max. total
breaking time
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
Min.
Tyeps
MB100-SW 32A
NF125-SW 32A
NF125-HW 32A
Max.
AC
DC
Max. total
breaking
time
×100% of Rated current
×100% of Rated current
Max. total
breaking time
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB100-SW.
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
2-pole
3, 4-pole
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F
S
V
F1SW (*1)
S1SW
V1SW (*2)
55
57
54
R R1SW
LC
Type name
LC-1SW
(*4) HLF-1SW
HL HLN-1SW
HL-S HLS-1SW (*1)(*4)
Reference
page
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*1)
58 Large TC-L TCL-1SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3 (*1)
70
Terminal cover
Left-side
mounting
AL
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
Type name
Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*1)
Pulg-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*1)
IEC 35mm rail
mounting adapters
Electrical
operation device
60
DIN-1SW3 (*1) 70
MDS-NF1SWE (*3)
Current rating (%)
61
130
120
110
100
90
80
–10
Reference
page
Rated ambient
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*3) Specify the working voltage. An order should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*4) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
75

Front connection
CL
Mounting hole
LC
Insulation barrier
(removable)
LC
50
M8 screw
24
Solderless terminal
for wire size
14~2/0AWG CU/AL
LC
LC
Breaker
LC
LC
112
130
84
50
Wire connection
LC
(*1)110-111
30
Trip
button
22
30
45
φ8.5
30
30
60
60
90
90
120
Neutral
pole
4
61
68
72
19 max.
8
2-pole
3-pole
M4X0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia. hole
4-pole
2-pole
3-pole
4-pole
90
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
Drilling plan
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
Mounting plate
t=3.2 max.
102
52
Mounting base
Stud rotatable
by 90°
4-pole
3-pole
2-pole
LC
CL
Breaker
CL
2-pole
LC
4-pole
3-pole CL
CL
Breaker
CL
15
Connection
allowance
112
8
CL
(*1)110-111
112
LC
R1
R1
16
52
8.5
68
72
2.5
15
54.5
104.5
M8 bolt
2.5
15
5
60
90
Insulation
tube
30
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting screw
2-pole
30
60
3-pole
φ18
Drilling plan
30
30
90
M4×0.7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
4-pole
57
86
Front-panel cutout
28
1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame.
6
Plug-in
3-pole
4-pole
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
M5×0.8
Terminal block
mounting screw
95
60
125
90
30
CL
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
LC
LC
5.5
20
LC
11
98
190
134
16.5 max.
12
LC
54
56 94 56
12.5
21
89
30
M8 screw
30
65
φ8.5
30 60
67 97
127
Details of terminal
2-pole
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
2-pole 3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
6mm-dia. hole
or M5×0.8 taps
Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 110 and 111 both sides.
Remark: 2-pole model of NF125-HW are 3-pole model with the central pole removed.
76

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Motor Breakers
NF250-CW
NF250-HW
NF160-HW
NF250-SW
NF160-SW
MB225-SW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 4 2 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690
690
600
690
690
AC
690V
500V
440V
–
15/8
25/13
5/3
30/8
50/13
–
10/5
15/8
–
15/8
25/13
5/3
30/8
50/13
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
400V
230V
30/15
50/25
50/13
100/25
18/9
35/18
30/15
50/25
50/13
100/25
250V 15/8 – 40/20 – 10/5 – 15/8 – 40/20 –
DC 400V – 15/8 – – 40/20 – – 10/5 – 15/8 – – 40/20 –
500V – 15/8 – 40/20 –
– 15/8 – 40/20
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
NF160-SW
NF160-HW
125 150 160 125 150 160
NF250-CW
(100)
125 150 175
200 225 250
NF250-SW
(100)
125 150 175
200 225 250
NF250-HW
125 150 175
200 225 250
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2 and 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
*1: When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 400 V DC, and 4-pole models for
up to 500 V DC.
MB225-SW
125 150 175
200 225
3
500
–
–
25/13
30/15
50/25
–
–
–
Type NF250-SW
■Operating Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Types
NF250-CW
NF250-SW
NF250-HW
Max.
MB225-SW
NF160-SW
NF160-HW
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Curreny rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
Rated ambient
Min.
2s
1s
0.5s
250A AC
Max. total
0.2s
125~225A AC breaking
250A DC
time
0.1s
125~225A DC
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current
Remark: (1) Only AC characteristics are available for the model MB225-SW.
(2) refer to page 44.
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
AL
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F
S
V
R
F2SW
S2SW
V2SW (*3)
R2SW
55
57
54
58
LC
(*4)
HL
HL-S
Type name
LC-2SW
HLF-2SW
HLN-2SW
HLS-2SW
Reference
page
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Type name
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*1)
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*1)
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*1)
Electrical
operation device
MDS-NF2SWE (*2)
Reference
page
60
61
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) Specify the working voltage. An order of MB225-SW should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.
(*3) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*4) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
77

Front connection
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier
(removable)
144
165 100
102
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
50
24
30
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125 175A 14 95mm 2
200 250A 70 125mm 2
Wire connection
Breaker
126
ø4.5
φ8.5
Trip button
22
70
105
3-pole
35
105
140
4-pole
Neutral
pole
100
φ8.5
45
61
68
4 72
92
23 max.
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection
10
35
3-pole
M4×0.7 taps
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
Insulating
tube
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
3-pole
Breaker
Connection
allowance
22
20
144
8
126
144
R1
52
68
72
15
71
106
15 φ9
M8 bolt
6
70
105
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting
screw
Insulating
tube
35
70
3-pole
ø24
M4×0.7
taps
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
35
105
4-pole
100
1mm clearance
on each side
of handle
Front-plate cutout
32.5
6
Plug-in
4-pole
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
3-pole
Breaker (Terminal block)
200
14
6
28 144
34.5
70
15
Connection
allowance
22
153
54
80 58.5
58.5
18
86
32
M6
Terminal block
mounting screw
Stud attachable in this
derection only
20
70
105
φ9
M8 bolt
Insulating barrier
70
φ7
107
3-pole
Drilling plan
105
142
4-pole
Remarks: 1. 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
2. Only 2- and 3-pole models are available for the model of NF250-CW, and only 3-pole models are available
for the model of MB225-SW.
78

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF250-SGW
NF160-SGW
NF125-SGW
NF250-HGW
NF160-HGW
NF125-HGW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
NF125-SGW
RT
16–25, 25–40,
40–63, 63–100,
80–125
NF125-SGW
RE
16–32, 32–63,
63–100, 75–125
NF125-HGW
RT
16–25, 25–40,
40–63, 63–100,
80–125
NF125-HGW
RE
16–32, 32–63,
63–100, 75–125
NF160-SGW
RT
125–160
NF160-SGW
RE
80–160
Number of poles
2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 2 3 4 3 4
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
690
690
690
690
690
690
690V 8/8
8/8
20/20 20/20
8/8
8/8
500V 30/30 30/30 50/50 50/50 30/30 30/30
AC 440V 36/36 36/36 65/65 65/65 36/36 36/36
IEC
60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
400V
230V
36/36
85/85
36/36
85/85
75/75
100/100
75/75
100/100
36/36
85/85
36/36
85/85
300V 20/20 –
– 40/40 –
– 20/20 –
–
DC ∗1 500V – 20/20 – – – 40/40 – – – 20/20 – –
600V – 20/20 –
– 40/40 –
– 20/20 –
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection) Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type name
NF160-HGW
RT
NF160-HGW
RE
NF250-SGW
RT
NF250-SGW
RE
NF250-HGW
RT
NF250-HGW
RE
Rated current In (Amp.)
125–160
80–160
125–160,
160–250
125–250
125–160
160–250
125–250
■Operating Characteristics
Operating time
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Min.
Type NF250-SGW
Time-delay trip
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Pre-alarm
pickup current IP
Ir × (0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9
-0.95-1.0) ±10%
Pre-alarm
operating time TP
TL
TP= ± 20% 2
(at 200%)
INST pickup current Il
In × (4~14) ±15%
AC
DC
×100% of Rated current
Thermal-Adjustable types
NF125-SGW/HGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A)
16-25A (Rated current In=25A)
Max.
Instantaneous trip
current ratio
AC DC
x In (%) x In (%)
1000±200 1300±260
Max. total
breaking
time
Instantaneous trip
Electric types
LTD operating time TL
12-60-80-100s ±20%
(at 200%)
NF160-SGW NF160-HGW
Operating time
Note)
Current setting Ir Rated current In
80~160A 160A
(Adjustable)
STD pickup current IS
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10)±15%
Max.total breaking
time
STD operating time TS
0.3±0.06s
0.2±0.04s
0.1±0.03s
0.06±0.02s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of Current setting
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
690V
500V
690
20/20
50/50
AC 440V 65/65
IEC
60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
400V
230V
75/75
100/100
300V 40/40 –
DC ∗1 500V – 40/40 –
600V – 40/40
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
×100% of Rated current
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
2 3 4
0.01s
3 4
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
–
–
–
×100% of Rated current
2 3 4
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
20/20 –
– 20/20 –
– 20/20
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
130
120
110
100
90
80
–10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
3 4
690
8/8
30/30
36/36
36/36
85/85
–
–
–
2 3 4
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
40/40 –
– 40/40 –
– 40/40
3 4
690
20/20
50/50
65/65
75/75
100/100
–
–
–
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs) Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
∗1: Use either 2-pole. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 13, 3-pole models can be used for up to 500 V DC, and 4-pole models for up to 600V DC.
Min.
Time-delay trip
Pre-alarm
pickup current IP
Ir × (0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9
-0.95-1.0) ± 10%
Pre-alarm
operating time TP
TP = TL ± 20%
2
(at 200%)
0.6 0.7
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
INST pickup current Il
In × (4~14) ± 15%
Thermal-Adjustable types
NF125-SGW/HGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A)
40-63A (Rated current In=63A)
AC
Max.
1 1.25 2 3 4
DC
Instantaneous trip
current ratio
AC DC
x In (%) x In (%)
1000±200
1300±260
Max. total
breaking
time
Instantaneous trip
Electric types
LTD operating time TL
12-60-80-100s ± 20%
(at 200%)
NF250-SGW NF250-HGW
Note)
Current setting Ir Rated current In
125~250A 250A
(Adjustable)
STD pickup current IS
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
Max.total breaking
time
STD operating time TS
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of Current setting
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
Min.
Time-delay trip
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Current rating (%)
Max.
AC
(Adjustable range)
DC
(Adjustable range)
RT type
Thermal-Adjustable types
NF250-SGW/HGW 160-250A (Rated current In=250A)
NF160-SGW/HGW 125-160A (Rated current In=160A)
NF125-SGW/HGW 80-125A (Rated current In=125A)
Instantaneous trip adjustment
range
Position AC DC
of notch x In (%) x In (%)
4 400±80 520±104
6 600 780
8 800 1040
10 1000±200 1300±260
Instantaneous trip
Max. total
breaking
time
Rated ambient
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Pre-alarm
pickup current IP
Ir × (0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9
-0.95-1.0) ± 10%
Pre-alarm
operating time TP
TL
TP= ± 20% 2
(at 200%)
Derating of Load current (%)
INST pickup current Il
In × (4~14) ±15%
130
120
110
100
90
80
RE type
70
–10
0
LTD operating time TL
12-60-80-100s ± 20%
(at 200%)
Electric types
NF125-SGW NF125-HGW
Note)
Current setting Ir
16~ 32A
32~ 63A
63~ 100A
75~ 125A
(Adjustable)
STD pickup current IS
Ir × (2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
Max.total breaking
time
Rated ambient
10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
STD operating time TS
0.3±0.06s
0.2±0.04s
0.1±0.03s
0.06±0.02s
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
× 100% of Current setting
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (× 100% of In)
Rated current In
32A
63A
100A
125A
79
■Internal Accessories
Right-side
mounting
SHT or UVT
Operating handle
Left-side
mounting
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
AL
AX
Lead wire direction
■External Accessories
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
F F2GSW
55 Mechanical
S S2GSW
57 interlock
Operating handle
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
V V2GSW (*3) 54
Small TC-S TCS-2GSW3W (*1)
R R2GSW 58 Large TC-L TCL-2GSW3W (*1)
LC LC-2GSW
Skeleton TTC TTC-2GSW3 (*1) 60
Handle lock device
(*2) HLF-2GSW
70
Rear BTC BTC-2GSW3W (*1)
HL HLN-2GSW
Plug-in PTC PTC-2GSW3W (*1)
HL-S HLS-2GSW
OFF Lock with 3 Padlock HLF3-2GSW 70
Electrical MDS-NF2GSWE
operation device
(*4)
61
Terminal cover
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
Notes:
(*1) The designation depends
on the number of poles.
Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF types are used for
OFF-lock, and HLN types
for ON-lock.
(*3) Attach the letter “F” to the
end of designation for a
fixed type.
(*4) Specify the working voltage.

Front connection
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier
(removable)
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
24
Solderless terminal
for wire size
2.5 185mm 2
10
Breaker
Trip
button
22
70
35
105
144
165 50
50
Neutral
pole
112
50
φ8.5
63
79
φ4.5
22
Hex-socket set screw
Wire connection
φ8.5
10
6.1
35
M4×0.7 taps
or φ5
35
126
105
3-pole
140
4-pole
4
86
90
24 max.
(Bus t max.=7)
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
110
Bus drilling for
direct connection
Rear connection
Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
Insulating tube
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Connection
allowance
22
20
144
8
126
144
R1
52
86
90
15
71
106
15
φ9
M8 bolt
6
70
105
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting
screw
Insulating
tube
35
70
3-pole
φ24
M4×0.7
taps
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
35
105
4-pole
100
1mm clearance
on each side
of handle
Front-panel cutout
32.5
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal block
4-pole
Breaker (Terminal block)
Mounting plate
15
86
30
45
12
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
96
M6
Terminal block
mounting screw
4
120
48 144
54.5
200
103
Stud can be
rotated 90°
Connection
allowance
10 48
20
3-pole
70
110
ø9 M8bolt
Insulating barrier
(removable)
70
φ7
107
3-pole
Drilling plan
105
142
4-pole
66
54 94 54
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
80

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF250-RGW
NF125-RGW
NF250-UGW
NF125-UGW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
NF125-RGW
RT
16–25 25–40
40–63 63–100
NF125-UGW
RT
16–25 25–40
40–63 63–100
NF250-RGW
RT
125–160
160–225
NF250-UGW
RT
125–160
160–225
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
AC
DC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
300V
500V
600V
2
3
2 3 4
2 3 2 3 4
690
25/25
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
–
–
–
690
30/30
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
–
–
690
25/25
125/125
125/125
125/125
125/125
–
–
–
690
30/30
200/200
200/200
200/200
200/200
–
–
–
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Type NF250-RGW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
4h
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
Thermal-Adjustable types
NF250-RGW/UGW 160-225A (Rated current In=225A)
125-160A (Rated current In=160A)
Instantaneous trip
adjustment range
Position
of notch
4
6
8
10
AC x In (%)
400±80
600
800
1000±200
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Thermal-Adjustable types
NF125-RGW/UGW 63-100A (Rated current In=100A)
40-63A (Rated current In=63A)
Instantaneous trip
current ratio
AC x In (%)
Max.
1000±200
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Thermal-Adjustable types
NF125-RGW/UGW 25-40A (Rated current In=40A)
16-25A (Rated current In=25A)
Instantaneous trip
current ratio
AC x In (%)
1000±200
Max.
2s
2s
2s
1s
0.5s
AC
(Adjustable range)
1s
0.5s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Max. total
breaking
time
0.2s
0.1s
AC
Max. total
breaking
time
0.2s
0.1s
AC
Max. total
breaking
time
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
SHT or UVT
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
80
–10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Mechanical interlock
Electrical operation device
Type name
F —
—
S
V
R
MI
—
V2GUW
R2GUW
MI-05SW3 (*1)
54
58
69
—
Reference
page
—
Terminal cover
Accessories
Small
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Plug-in
Handle lock
device
TC-S
TC-L
TTC
BTC
Type name
TCS-2GSW3W (*1)
TCL-2GSW3W (*1)
TTC-2GSW3 (*1)
BTC-2GSW3W (*1)
PTC PTC-2GSW3W (*1)
LC LC-2GSW
(*2) HLF-2GSW
HL HLN-2GSW
HL-S HLS-2GSW
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Reference
page
60
70
81

Front connection
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier
(removable)
26.5
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
24
Solderless terminal
for wire size
2.5 185mm 2
10
Breaker
Trip
button
22
70
105
3-pole
35
105
140
4-pole
219
50 240
50
Neutral
pole
75
165
112
50
φ8.5
86
4 90
110
63
79
φ4.5
22
24 max.
φ8.5
10
6.1
Hex-socket set screw
Wire connection
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection
35
3-pole
M4×0.7 taps
or φ5
35
Drilling plan
4-pole
201
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
Insulating tube
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
3-pole
Breaker
73
108
11.5
Connection
allowance
22
20
219
8
201
219
R1
52
15
86 71
90 106
φ9
15 M8 bolt
6
70
105
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting
screw
Insulating
tube
35
70
3-pole
ø24
M4×0.7
taps
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
35
105
4-pole
100
32.5
1mm clearance
on each side
of handle
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal
block
Breaker
(Terminal block)
275
14
6
34.5
219
28
70
15
Connection
allowance
22
153
129
58.5 155
58.5
18
104
32
M6
Terminal block
mounting screw
Stud attachable in this
derection only
20
70
φ9 M8bolt
Insulating
barrier
70
107
Drilling plan
φ7
Remark: 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
82

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF400-CW
NF400-SW
Type NF400-SW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 AC
(Icu/Ics)
DC(*1)
Standard Attached Parts
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
Front
connection
Rear
connection
NF400-CW
NF400-SW
250 300 350 400
2 3 2 3 4
690
–
15/8
25/13
36/18
50/25
20/10
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
40/40
Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Note: (*1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, 3-pole models can be
used for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
2h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Type
NF400-CW
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Type
NF400-SW
2min
2min
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
2s
2s
1s
0.5s
AC
1s
0.5s
DC
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
DC
Max. total
interrupting time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
AC
Max.total
interrupting time
0.02s
0.01s
100 125
Time delay trip
Instantaneous trip
200 300 400 500 600700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
0.02s
0.01s
100 125
Time delay trip
Instantaneous trip
200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of Rated current
% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
AX
SHT or UVT
(*1)
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Reference ambient
temperature
(*1) (*1)
(*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SW
S4CW, S4SW
V4SWF, V4SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
(HT) HT-4CW, HT4SW
Reference
page
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
54
69
70
Large
Skeleton
Rear
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)
(TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*1)
(BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)
Handle
lock device
HL
HL-S
HL-4CW, HL-4SW
HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device
Terminal cover
Accessories
Type name
(Reference ambient temperature 40°C)
Reference
page
60
70
61
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
83

Front connection
110
Insulating barrier (removable)
28
16
43
Conductor thickness
t=8 max.
94.5
8
44
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Mounting hole
Trip button
51
112
140
3-pole
ø14
M12 bolt
56
168
185
196
4-pole
257
Neutral pole
102 39
39
5
ø12.5
ø7
97
103
107
47
44
155 (NF400-SW)
134 (NF400-CW)
25
12
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
194
R6
118
92
1.0mm clearance on each side of the
handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection type
barriers (3-pole)
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Groove for reducing
heat by overcurrent
25 20 20
113
10
6
Plug-in
35
8
Line side
6-ø35
8
24
Connection
allowance
M6 tap or ø7
24
4-M6 tap or ø7
225
265
14
194
225
194
225
26
ø13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
87
130.5
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
Insulation tube
44
87
ø35
44
43.5
130.5
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plate
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
280
18
121
24
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
8
28 225
160
Connection
allowance
79
15
24
ø13
M12 bolt
28
87
130.5
Stud attachable in this
direction only
Insulating barrier
ø10
44
136
3-pole
87
181
4-pole
135
163 55
55
Drilling plan
Remark: (1) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
84

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF400-SEW
NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
NF400-SEW NF400-HEW NF400-REW
200-400
adjustable
3 4 3 4
3
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
690
35/18
50/50
65/65
70/70
100/100
690
—
70/35
125/63
125/63
150/75
Type NF400-SEW
Standard Attached Parts
Front
connection
Rear
connection
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h
2h
Types
NF400-SEW
NF400-HEW
NF400-REW
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
LTD operating time
at 125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Current setting Rated Current
Ir: 200~400A In: 400A
(Adjustable)
LTD operating time TL
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20%
2
(at 200%)
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x4~x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. total
breaking time
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current setting (×100% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
Operating handle
Right-side
Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting
direction
PAL TI
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SW
S4SW
V4SWF, V4SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*2)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
Reference
page
Notes: (*1) This is for NF400-SEW.
(*2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
54
69
70
(*1)
Terminal cover
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)(*2)
(TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*2)
(BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)(*2)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
■Temperature Characteristics
Reference
page
60
70
61
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
Rated ambient
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
85

Front connection
110
Insulating barrier (removable)
28
16
43
Conductor thickness
t=8 max.
94.5
8
44
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Mounting hole
Trip button
51
112
140
3-pole
ø14
M12 bolt
56
168
185
196
4-pole
257
Neutral pole
102 39
39
5
59
ø12.5
ø7
44
97
103
107
155
25
12
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
194
R6
118
92
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting plate
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Groove for reducing
heat by overcurrent
25 20 20
113
10
6
Plug-in
35
8
Line side
6-ø35
8
24
Connection
allowance
M6 tap or ø7
24
4-M6 tap or ø7
225
265
14
194
225
194
225
26
ø13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
87
130.5
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
Insulation tube
44
87
ø35
44
43.5
130.5
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plate
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
280
18
121
24
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
8
28 225
160
Connection
allowance
79
15
24
ø13
M12 bolt
28
87
130.5
Stud attachable in
this direction only
Insulating barrier
ø10
44
136
3-pole
87
181
4-pole
135
163 55
55
Drilling plan
86

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF400-UEW
Type NF400-UEW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
Standard Attached Parts
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
Front
connection
Rear
connection
NF400-UEW
200-400
adjustable
3 4
690
—
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
Mounting screw: M6×65 (2pcs), M6×174 (2pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×72 (2pcs), M6×181 (2pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
Operating time
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20%
2
(at 200%)
LTD operating time
at 125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Type
NF400-UEW
Current setting Rated Current
Ir: 200~400A In: 400A
(Adjustable)
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x4~x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. total
breaking time
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current setting (×100% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
Operating handle
Right-side
Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting
direction
PAL TI
F F4UW (*1)
Operating handle
S S4SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side
mounting.
Remark: (1) Specification of 4-pole model is same as that of NF800-UEW.
(2) refer to page 97.
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
Reference
page
Note: (*1)The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
69
70
(*1)
Terminal cover
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)
(TTC) —
(BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4UW
■Current reducing curve
Reference
page
60
—
60
70
61
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
Rated ambient
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
87

Front connection
Insulating barrier (removable)
127.5
110
43
Conductor thickness
t=8 max.
78
8
Breaker
Breaker
Mounting hole
Trip button
16
43 297
257
191.5
ø14
51
28
M12 bolt
194
200
112
5 204
140
3-pole
252
102
31
39
ø12.5
ø12.5
ø7
ø7
156
141
47
25
11.5
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Conductor drilling for direct connection
44
3-pole
Drilling plan
234
M6 tap or ø7
R6
118
26
1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
92
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
Breaker
Groove for reducing
heat by overcurrent
Line side
6-ø35
265
8
305
8
234
24
Connection
allowance
M6 screw or ø7
265
234
265
24
4-M6 tap or ø7
25 20 20
26
14
24 24
210
10
ø13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
87
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
Insulation tube
44
87
ø35
11 11
44
87
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
3-pole
Drilling plan
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal block
35
Breaker
Mounting angle
320
297
24
18
Mounting angle
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
8
28 265
160
Connection
allowance
79
15
24
28
Stud attachable
in this direction only
ø10
44
175
max. 203
218
3-pole
ø13
M12 bolt
87
Insulating barrier
3-pole
Drilling plan
Note (1): Overall dimension of 4-pole model is same as that of 4-pole model of NF800-UEW. Refer to page 98.
88

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF630-CW
NF630-SW
Type NF630-SW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
DC(*1)
Standard Attached Parts
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
Front
connection
Rear
connection
NF630-CW
NF630-SW
500 600 630
2 3 2 3 4
690
–
18/9
36/18
36/18
50/25
20/10
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
40/40
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
Note: (*1) When wired as shown at the bottom of page 17, 3-pole models can be used
for up to 400VDC, and 4-pole models for up to 500VDC.
4h
2h
1h
Type
1h
Type
30min
NF630-CW
30min
NF630-SW
20min
14min
10min
20min
14min
10min
6min
6min
4min
4min
2min
2min
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
2s
2s
1s
0.5s
AC
1s
0.5s
DC
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
DC
Max.total
interrupting time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
AC
Max.total
interrupting time
0.02s
0.01s
100 125
Time delay trip
Instantaneous trip
200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
0.02s
0.01s
100 125
Time delay trip
Instantaneous trip
200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of Rated current
% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
AX
SHT or UVT
(*1)
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Reference ambient
temperature
■External Accessories
(*1) (*1)
(*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
F F4SW
55 Large (TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)
Operating handle S S4SW
57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*1)
V V4SWF, V4SW 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1) 69 Handle HL HL-4SW
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
70
lock device HL-S HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Terminal cover
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
(Reference ambient temperature 40°C)
Ambient temperature (°C)
Reference
page
60
70
61
89

Front connection
110
Mounting hole
LC
LC
Insulating barrier
(removable)
LC
28
16
43
257
Bus
t max.=10
39
102
94.5
44
8
59
12
30
ø10.5
Bus t max.=10
Bus drilling for
direct connection
4-pole
3-pole
C L
Breaker
LC C L
LC
R6
Breaker
92
Trip button
ø12.5
ø7
39
LC
194
Neutral pole
44
118
51
112
140
ø14
M12 bolt
56
168
185
196
5
97
103
107
155
44
3-pole
M6 screw
or ø7
44
4-pole
1.0mm clearance on each
side of handle.
Front-plate cutout
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting plate
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
LC
Eddy-current
heat-reducing slit
LC
8
Line side
6-ø35
24
8
24
LC
Connection
allowance
25 20
20
225
265
14
M6 screw
or ø7
LC
194
225
194
225
4-M6 tap
or ø7
280
10
113
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal block
LC
ø13
M12 bolt
Mounting plate
25
10 32
128
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
83
35
225
28
8
87
130.5
Connection allowance
160
93
M6 breaker
mounting screw
Insulating tube
attached to
3P:Center pole
4P:Center &
neutral poles
25
4-pole
3-pole
LC
44
87
3-pole
ø35
Drilling plan
44
43.5
130.5
4-pole
LC
ø10
LC
Breaker
Load side
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped
holes in 8 positions
to standard boring.
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
LC
135
163 55
55
6
18
20
30
Stud attachable in
this direction only
44
87
121
ø13
M12 bolt
110
165.5
Insulating barrier
136
3-pole
181
4-pole
Drilling plan
Remark: (1) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
90

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF630-SEW
NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
NF630-SEW NF630-HEW NF630-REW
300-630
adjustable
3 4 3 4
3
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
690
35/18
50/50
65/65
70/70
100/100
690
—
70/35
125/63
125/63
150/75
Type NF630-SEW
Standard Attached Parts
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.)
Front
connection
Rear
connection
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×85 (4pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h
Types
NF630-SEW
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
LTD operating time
at 125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
NF630-HEW
NF630-REW
Current setting Rated Current
Ir: 300~630A In: 630A
(Adjustable)
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
0.5s
0.2s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20%
2
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1s
0.05s
(at 200%)
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x4~x15 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current (×100% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
Max. total
breaking time
■Internal Accessories
■Temperature Characteristics
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting
direction
PAL TI
(*1)
(*1) (*1) (*1)
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
Rated ambient
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SW
S4SW
V4SWF, V4SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
Reference
page
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
54
69
70
Terminal cover
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)
(TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*1)
(BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
Reference
page
60
70
61
91

Front connection
110
Mounting hole
LC
LC
Insulating barrier
(removable)
LC
28
16
43
257
Bus
t max.=10
39
102
94.5
44
8
59
12
30
ø10.5
Bus t max.=10
Bus drilling for
direct connection
4-pole
3-pole
C L
Breaker
LC C L
LC
R6
Breaker
92
Trip button
ø12.5
ø7
39
LC
194
Neutral pole
44
118
51
112
140
ø14
M12 bolt
56
168
185
196
5
97
103
107
155
44
3-pole
M6 screw
or ø7
44
4-pole
1.0mm clearance on each
side of handle.
Front-plate cutout
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting plate
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
LC
Eddy-current
heat-reducing slit
LC
8
Line side
6-ø35
24
8
24
LC
Connection
allowance
25 20
20
225
265
14
M6 screw
or ø7
LC
194
225
194
225
4-M6 tap
or ø7
280
10
113
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal block
LC
ø13
M12 bolt
Mounting plate
25
10 32
128
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
83
35
225
28
8
87
130.5
Connection allowance
160
93
M6 breaker
mounting screw
Insulating tube
attached to
3P:Center pole
4P:Center &
neutral poles
25
4-pole
3-pole
LC
44
87
3-pole
ø35
Drilling plan
44
43.5
130.5
4-pole
LC
ø10
LC
Breaker
Load side
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped
holes in 8 positions
to standard boring.
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
LC
135
163 55
55
6
18
20
30
Stud attachable in
this direction only
44
87
121
ø13
M12 bolt
110
165.5
Insulating barrier
136
3-pole
181
4-pole
Drilling plan
92

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF800-CEW
NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
Type NF800-SEW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
Standard Attached Parts
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
Front
connection
Rear
connection
NF800-CEW NF800-SEW NF800-HEW NF800-REW
400-800
adjustable
3 3 4 3 4 3
690
—
18/9
36/18
36/18
50/25
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
50/50
85/85
690
15/15
50/50
65/65
70/70
100/100
690
—
70/35
125/63
125/63
150/75
Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×40 (4pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
Operating time
10h
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20%
2
(at 200%)
LTD operating time
at 125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Current setting
Ir: 400~800A
(Adjustable)
Types
NF800-CEW
NF800-SEW
NF800-HEW
NF800-REW
Rated Current
In: 800A
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x4~x12 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. total
breaking time
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current (×100% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
(*1)
Operating handle
Right-side
Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting
direction
PAL TI
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
■External Accessories
(*1) (*1)
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
F F8SW
55 Large (TC-L) TCL-8SW3 (*1)
Operating handle S S4SW
57 Skeleton (TTC) TTC-8SW3 (*1)
V V8SWF, V8SW 54 Rear (BTC) BTC-8SW3 (*1)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-8SW3 (*1) 69 Handle HL HL-4SW
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
70
lock device HL-S HLS-8SW
Electrical operation device
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Terminal cover
(*1)
■Current Reducing Curve
Reference
page
60
70
61
Working current correcting ratio (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
Reference
ambient
temperature
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
The rated current does not
depend on temperature.
However, if ambient
temperature exceeds 40°C,
reduce the continuous
working current as left
curve.
93

Front connection
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier (removable)
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
94.5
46
26
4-pole
110
32
87
275
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
102
8
15
Terminal dimension for
directly connecting
conductor
Breaker
243
R6
3-pole
Breake
92
32
N
8
ø8
ø8.5
Trip button
14
51
70
40
210
140
210 280
3-pole
4-pole
32
15
87
Neutral pole
ø14
M12 bolt
ø14
5
97
103
107
155
217
8
46
40
22
12
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.) 3-pole
Conductor drilling for direct connection
70 M6 tap
70
or ø7
Drilling plan
4-pole
172
51
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Connection allowance
25
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Groove for reducing
heat by overcurrent
10 5
5
10
6-ø48
24 24
4-M6 tap or ø7
13
243
295
12.5
243
243
10
113 110
45
8 32 15
ø13
M12 bolt
8
140
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
70
140
3-pole
ø48
Drilling plan
70
70
210
4-pole
11 11
70
140
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
Stud can be rotated 90°
Breaker
23
126
20
10
243
301
Connection allowance
25
M8 terminal block mounting screw
40
140
13
8
32
15
ø13
M12 bolt
112
70
208
ø10
140
278
155
56 187 56
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
94

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF800-SDW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
NF800-SDW
(700), 800
2
690
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant
not larger than
10ms
DC
250V
40/40
Standard Attached Parts
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.)
Front
connection
Rear
connection
Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: M6×40 (4pcs)
Type NF800-SDW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Type
NF800-SDW
700A,800A
DC
Inst. trip adjustment
range (4 steps)
Operating time
2min
1min.
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
Control
setting
Lo
2
3
Hi
Inst trip
current (A)
2600±520
3900±780
5200±1040
6500±1300
2s
1s
Adjustment
range
700A
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Adjustment
range
800A
Max. total
interrupting time
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Inst trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
(*1) (*1)
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
■External Accessories
(An order for
(*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
Accessories
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F8SW
S4SW
V8SWF, V8SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-8SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
Reference
page
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
54
69
70
Terminal cover
(*1)
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-8SW3 (*1)
(TTC) TTC-8SW3 (*1)
(BTC) BTC-8SW3 (*1)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-8SW
Reference
page
60
70
61
80
Rated ambient 40°C 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
95

Front connection
Breaker
110
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier (removable)
32
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
87
94.5
46
8
26
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
275
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
102
15
Terminal dimension for
directly connecting
conductor
ø8.5
70
3-pole
M6 tap or ø7
R6
92
N
8
ø8
12
Trip button
14
32
51
70
40
210
140
210 280
3-pole
4-pole
32
15
87
Neutral pole
ø14
M12 bolt
ø14
5
97
103
107
155
217
22
8
40
46
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection
70
4-pole
243
51
172
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Connection allowance
25
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Groove for reducing heat
by overcurrent
6-ø48
13
243
295
12.5
10 5
243
5
10
24 24
4-M6 tap or ø7
243
10
113 110
45
8 32 15
ø13
M12 bolt
8
140
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
70
140
3-pole
ø48
Drilling plan
70
70
210
4-pole
11 11
70
140
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
Plug-in terminal block
Breaker
20
243
301
Connection allowance
25
13
8
32
112
155
56 187 56
23
126
M8 terminal block mounting screw
40
140
15
ø13
M12 bolt
70
208
ø10
140
278
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF800-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are available for DC special voltage.
(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
96

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF800-UEW
Type NF800-UEW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
Standard Attached Parts
(4-pole models are provided
with auxiliary handle.)
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
Front
connection
Rear
connection
NF800-UEW
400-800
adjustable
3 4
690
35/35
170/170
200/200
200/200
200/200
Mounting screw: 3P: M6×35, M6×132 (2pcs each)
4P: M6×35 (3pcs), M6×132 (2pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Mounting screw: 3P: M6×40, M6×137 (2pcs each)
4P: M6×40 (3pcs), M6×137 (2pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h
Type
2h
NF800-UEW
Operating time
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9 ±10%
-0.95-1.0)
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20% 2
(at 200%)
LTD operating time
at-125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Current setting
Ir: 400~800A Rated Current
(Adjustable) In: 800A
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x4~x12 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. total
breaking time
0.6 0.7 1 1.25 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Current (×100% of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
(*1)
Operating handle
Right-side
Lead wire
AL AX SHT or UVT
mounting
direction
PAL TI
(*1) (*1)
(*1)
■Current reducing curve
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
Rated ambient
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separately for left-side mounting.
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F8UW(*1)
S4SW
—
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-8SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
Reference
page
55
57
—
69
70
Terminal cover
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-8UW3 (*1)
(TTC) —
(BTC) BTC-8SW3 (*1)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-8UW
Reference
page
60
—
60
70
61
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
97

Front connection
110
Mounting hole
Insulating barrier (removable)
N
8
87
322
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
275
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
102
27.5
143
64
8
ø14
15
112
ø7 ø7
ø8.5
44 (ON side)
123.5 (OFF side)
Terminal dimension for
directly connecting
conductor
12
Trip button
14
51
70
40
210
140
210 280
3-pole
4-pole
Breaker
70
32
15
87
Neutral pole
ø14
M12 bolt
ø14
5
Mounting hole
143
194
200
204
252
314
8
Insulating barrier (removable)
48
110
22
40
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
Conductor drilling for
direct connection
Conductor
thickness
t=8 max.
143
97
6.5
ø14
ø7
R6
4-pole
3-pole
51
172
Breaker
22.5
92
290
322
275
102
27.5
15
112
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
N
16
ø7
70
M6 screw or ø7
3-pole
Drilling plan
70
4-pole
Trip button
51
70
210
280
35
48
ø14
M12 bolt
Neutral pole
ø14
5
6.5
141
194
200
204
NF400-UEW 4-pole
314
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
6
Standard direction of stud is horizontal
Connection on power side, and vertical on load side.
Mounting plate allowance Otherwise, specify the direction.
25
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Groove for reducing
heat by overcurrent
13
10 5
45
12.5
290
342
290
6-ø48
24 24
24 24
290
252
Mounting plate
Connection
allowance Stud can be
25 rotated 90˚
8
5
10
4-M6 tap or ø7
26
290
342
8 32 15
10
10
210 110
ø13
140
M12 bolt
M6 screw for
mounting
breaker
70
140
3-pole
ø48
70
70
210
4-pole
10
210 83
20
NF400-UEW 4-pole
ø13
M12 bolt
11 11
70
140
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
Drilling plan
98

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF1000-SEW
NF1250-SEW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
NF1000-SEW
500–1000
Adjustable
NF1250-SEW
600–1250
Adjustable
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
3 4
690
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
3 4
690
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
Type NF1250-SEW
Standard Attached Parts
Front
connection
Rear
connection
Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8×40 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
10h
5h
2h
Type
NF1000-SEW
5h
2h
Type
NF1250-SEW
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
LTD operating time at-125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Current setting
Ir:500-1000A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In:1000A
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
LTD operating time
at-125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Current setting
Ir:600-1250A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In:1250A
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10%
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10%
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
1s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ± 20% 2
(at 200%)
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ± 20% 2
(at 200%)
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x (4~x12) ± 15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. total
breaking time
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x (4~x12) ± 15%
(Magnification to In)
Max. total
breaking time
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (of In)
Current (of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (of In)
■Internal Accessories
■Current reduction curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
Remark: (*1) refer to page 45.
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
PAL
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
Rated ambient
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
Operating handle
F F10SW (*1) 55 Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
S S10SW
57 Handle lock (HL)
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-10SW3 (*1) 69 Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-10SW3 (*1)
Electrical operation device
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Reference
page
70
60
61
99

Front connection
110
Insulating barrier (removable)
Mounting
hole
Conductor thickness
t=8 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
15 40
Breaker
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
8
406
346
375
13
ø9.5
15 32
ø13 M12 bolt
43
140
210
3-pole
80
70
210
280
4-pole
Neutral pole
ø17.5
15 44
133.5
17 140
190
280
18.5
70 M8 tap or ø10 70
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
Rear connection
Mounting plate
M8 screw for mounting breaker
Stud can be rotated 90°
Breaker
35.5
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
13
140
8 32 15
97
109
18 Connection
allowance
ø13
22
45
273
12
140
Conductor thickness
t=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 45
Insulation cover
(removable)
86 39.5 86
81.5
269
70 70 80
230
300
1.0mm clearance on each
M8 tap or ø10
side of the handle frame.
3-pole
4-pole
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
R11.5
97
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plate
M10 terminal block mounting screw
Breaker
225
25.5
68
208 134
12 105
269
Stud can be rotated 90°
Conductor thickness
t=6 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 45
30
Connection
allowance
ø13
Insulating
barrier
140
43
13
15 32 8
104
ø12
70
204
3-pole
Drilling plan
140
274
4-pole
136 100.5 136 28.5
28.5 269
6
100

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF1250-SDW
Type NF1250-SDW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated shortcircuit
breaking
capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant
not larger than
10ms
DC 250V
Standard Attached
Parts
Front
connection
Rear
connection
NF1250-SDW
1000, 1250
2
690
40/20
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Insulating cover: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■Operating Characteristics
3h
2h
3h
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
Maximum
Type
NF1250-SDW
1000A
DC
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
Maximum
Type
NF1250-SDW
1250A
DC
2min
2min
Operating time
1min
40s
30s
20s
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s
Minimum
Inst. trip adjustment range
(4 steps)
Control
Inst. trip
setting
current(A)
L0
2800 ± 700
2
4200 ± 700
3
5600 ± 700
Hi
7000 ± 700
Operating time
1min
40s
30s
20s
10s
6s
4s
2s
1s
0.6s
0.4s
Minimum
Inst. trip adjustment range
(4 steps)
Control
Inst. trip
setting
current(A)
L0
2800 ± 700
2
4200 ± 700
3
5600 ± 700
Hi
7000 ± 700
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
Max. total
interrupting time
0.0.4s
Time
0.02s
delay trip
Inst. trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70
0.1s
0.06s
Max. total
interrupting time
0.0.4s
0.02s Time
delay trip
Inst. trip
0.01s
1 1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70
Current (×100% of rated current)
Current (×100% of rated current)
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
1000A
120
110
1250A
100
Rated ambient
90
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
80
5
10
20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories
Type name
Operating handle
F F10SW (*1)
S S10SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-10SW3 (*1)
Reference
page
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
69
Accessories
Type name
Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
Handle lock (HL)
Large terminal cover (TC-L) TCL-10SW3 (*1)
Electrical operation device
Reference
page
70
60
61
101

Front connection
Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
110
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Mounting hole
Conductor thickness
t=8 × 2pcs max.
Bolt M12 × 50
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
15 40
Breaker
13
8
406
ø9.5
15 32
346
375
ø13 M12 bolt
43
140
210
3-pole
80
70
210
280
4-pole
ø17.5
15 44
133.5
17 140
190
280
18.5
70 70
M8 screw or ø10
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
Rear connection
Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
18
Mounting plate
M8 screw for mounting breaker
Stud can be rotated 90˚
Breaker
35.5
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
109
86
187.5
R11.5
13
Connection allowance
22 ø13
45
233
Conductor thickness
t=6 × 2pcs max.
86
375
97
140
18
8 32 15
97
12
Bolt M12 × 45
70 70
140 230
300
Insulation cover
(removable)
M8 screw or ø10
3-pole
4-pole
20.5
80
1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame.
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1000-SEW and NF1250-SEW.
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plate
M10 terminal block mounting screw
Stud can be rotated 90˚
Breaker
248
48
318
375
208
68 25.5
134
12
30
Connection allowance
Conductor thickness
t=6 × 2pcs max. ø13
43
140
Bolt M12 × 45 Insulating barrier
13
15 8
32
104
70
204
3-pole
ø12
140
274
4-pole
Drilling plan
Remarks: (1) Standard specifications of NF1250-SDW is 2-pole models. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.
(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
102

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF1600-SEW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
NF1600-SEW
Adjustable
800–1600
Type NF1600-SEW
Number of poles
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Standard Attached
Parts
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
Front
connection
Rear
connection
3 4
690
25/13
65/33
85/43
85/43
125/63
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
5h
2h
Type
NF1600-SEW
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
LTD operating time at-125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Current setting
Ir:800-1600A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In:1600A
6min
4min
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
In x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0) ± 10%
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ± 20% 2
(at 200%)
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ± 20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
In x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ± 15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x (4~12) ± 15%
(Magnification to In)
Current (of Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (of In)
Max. total
breaking time
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
■Internal Accessories
■Current reducing curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
PAL
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
Rated ambient
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories
Type name
Operating handle
F F10SW (*1)
S S10SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-16SW3 (*1)
Reference
page
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
55
57
69
Accessories
Type name
Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
Handle lock (HL)
Electrical operation device
Reference
page
70
61
103

Front connection
Insulating barrier 60
(removable)
38
(185.5)
15
38
ø11
(185.5)
Conductor thickness t=6 × W75 max.
Bolt M10 × 65
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
20 35
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Mounting hole
210 280
18.5
R11.5
406
346
375
97
N
ø17.5
ø9.5
203
263
3-pole
115
101.5
304.5
364.5
4-pole
130
Neutral pole
17
20
133.5
140
190
280
49.5
70 70
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
M8 tap or ø10
80
1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Rear connection
Connection
allowance
15 38 15
38
38
212
60
18
106 106
318
Stud can be rotated 90˚
Mounting angle
Conductor thickness
t=6 × W75 max.
Stud can be rotated 90˚
Mounting angle
Conductor thickness
t=6 × W75 max.
273
Breaker
Mounting angle
18 20
109
273
160 min.
100 max.
81.5
269
15
20
109
Connection
allowance
140
3-pole
140
38 38
125 15
200
15
60
36
ø11
BM10 × 50 bolt
70
210
4-pole
140 125
54
ø11
M10 × 50 bolt
70 M8 tap or ø10 70
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
6
104

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF1600-SDW
Type name
NF1600-SDW
Rated current In (Amp.)
1600
Number of poles
2
Reted insulation voltage Ui (V)
Rated shortcircuit
breaking
capacity (kA)
690
IEC 60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Time constant
not larger than
10msec
DC
250V
40/20
Type NF1600-SDW
Standard Attached
Parts
Front
connection
Rear
connection
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Insulating barrier: (2P: 1pc, 3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
Mounting screw: M8 × 40 (4pcs)
Auxiliary handle: (1pc)
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Max. allowable time of Overcurrent
Type
NF1600-SDW
for MAG-ONLY
1600A
DC
2min
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Inst. trip adjustment
range (4 steps)
Contro Inst. trip
settingl current(A)
2s
1s
0.5s
Lo
2
3
Hi
3200±800
4800±800
6400±800
8000±800
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
interrupting time
0.02s
Inst.trip
0.01s
100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
×100% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL
mounting
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Remark: (1) refer to page 45.
■External Accessories
(An order for should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
Operating handle
Mechanical interlock
F F10SW (*1)
S S10SW
(MI) MI-16SW3 (*1)
55 Auxiliary handle HT-10SW
57 Handle lock (HL)
69 Electrical operation device
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
70
61
105

Front connection
Outside dimensions are same as those of NF1600-SEW.
Insulating barrier
(removable)
(185.5)
60 ø11
38
15
38
Conductor thickness t=6 × W75 max.
20 35
210 Mounting hole
280
18.5
R11.5
ø17.5
ø9.5
97
(185.5)
Bolt M10 × 65
Auxiliary handle
(removable)
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
406
346
375
203
263
3-pole
115
101.5
304.5
364.5
4-pole
130
17
M8 tap or ø10
20 49.5
70 70 80
133.5
140
190
280
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Rear connection
Outside dimensions are different from those of NF1600-SEW.
Connection allowance
15 38 15
212
106
318
18 38
60
106
Mounting angle
36
ø11
Conductor thickness
Mounting angle M10 × 50 bolt
t=6 × W75 max. Conductor thickness
t=6 × W75 max.
20
Connection allowance
15
38
60
109
233
20
109
233
Breaker
Mounting angle
175 min. 160 min.
375
140
Stud can be rotated 90˚
3-pole
38
125
140 200
ø11
38 15 M10 × 50 bolt
15
Stud is in horizontal direction.
Stud can not be rotated 90˚
4-pole
140
125
70 70
M8 tap or ø10
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
6
Remarks: (1) Standard specification of NF1600-SDW is 2-pole model. 3-pole and 4-pole models are for DC special voltage.
(2) 2-pole models are 3-pole models with the central pole removed.
106

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV30-CS
Type NV30-CS
Type name
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Rated current In (A)
High-speed
type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max.operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max.operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Time-delay
type
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
440V
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2
AC 400V
Icu/Ics
230V
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
NV30-CS
3
100–230 Multi-voltage type
5 10 15 20 30
30
0.04
—
—
—
Button
—
—
2.5/2
Mounting screw: M4 × 0.7 × 20 (2pcs.)
■Operating Characteristics
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
3h
Operating time
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
40s
30s
20s
10s
6s
4s
Max.
Type NV30-CS
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
2s
0.01s
1s
0.6s
0.4s
Min.
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.2s
0.1s
0.06s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
1
1.25 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 40 50 70 100
×100% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Temperature Characteristics
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
MG
Remark: (1) Standard lead wire is drawn from side. However, lead wire drawn by load can be produced
upon request.
(2) refer to page 44.
AX
Lead wire
direction
Operating time change rate (%)
300
250
200
150
100
80
70
–10
0
10
Rated ambient
20
30
40
Ambient temperature (°C)
50
60
■External Accessories
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
Test button
Lock cover (LC)
Rail mounting adapter
Handle lock device
LC03CS
DIN-03CS
HL-05FH
70
70
70
Terminal cover
Small
Large
Rear
Skeleton
(TC-S)
(TC-L)
(BTC)
(TTC)
TCS-03CS3W
TCL-03CS3W
BTC-03CS
TTC-03CS
60
Line side
ZCT
Load side
Magnetic
device
Senstivity
selector
Leakage
indication button
107

Front connection
Mtg. hole
67.5
Test button
M5 screw
14.5
Applicable
wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm 2
Breaker
76.5
96
64
54
50
ø8.5
10
ø5.5
ø5
6
84
23.5
Leakage
indicator button
4
28
49
52
55
12.5 (max)
Bus t max. =3
Bus drilling for
direct connection
23.5
Drilling plan
M4 ✕ 0.7
taps or ø5
67
Rear connection
Mtg plate t max =3.2
M4 ✕ 0.7 taps
or ø5
Breaker
Breaker
R1
76.5
45 (min)
25 (min)
5
76.5
84
52
38.5
58.5
23.5
ø14
65
55
Insulating tube
8
M6 screw
Breaker mtg
M4 ✕ 0.7 screw
47
Drilling plan
Front-plate cutout
6
108

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV32-SW
NV63-SW
NV63-CW
NV63-HW
Type name NV32-SW NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 3 3 3 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
High-speed type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
(5) 6 10
(15) 16 20
25 (30) 32
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
(5) (10) (15) 16
20 25 (30) 32
40 50 (60) 63
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
(5) (10) (15) 16
20 25 (30) 32
40 50 (60) 63
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
(15) 16 20 25
(30) 32 40 50
(60) 63
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04
Button
Button
Button
Button
5/2
2.5/1
7.5/4
10/5
5/2
5/2
7.5/4
10/5
10/5
7.5/4
15/8
25/13
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs) excluding models of NV63-CW
Type NV63-SW
■Operating Characteristics
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
4h
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Max.
Types
NV32-SW
NV63-CW NV63-SW NV63-HW
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
2s
1s
Min.
0.2s
0.1s
0.5s
0.04s
0.02s
0.2s
0.01s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Temperature Characteristics
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
Left-side
mounting
AL
MG
TBM
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AX UVT
EAL
Lead wire
direction
Operating time change rate (%)
300
250
200
150
100
80
70
–10
0
10
20
30
Rated ambient
40
Ambient temperature (°C)
50
60
■External Accessories
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F
S
V
Type name
F05SW
S05SW
V05SWF
Reference
page
55
57
54
R —
LC
(*1)
HL
HL-S
LC-05SW
HLF-05SW
HLN-05SW
HLS-05SW
—
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Type name
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*1) 69
Small TC-S TCS-05SW3W
Large TC-L TCL-05SW3W
Skeleton TTC TTC-05SW3
Rear BTC BTC-05SW3W
Plug-in PTC PTC-05SW3W
Reference
page
60
Line side
Magnetic
device
Test button
Senstivity
selector
ZCT
Load side
IEC 35mm rail
mounting adapters
DIN-05SW 70
Note: (*1) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Leakage
indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
109

Front connection
Insulation barrier
(removable)
M5×0.8 screw
(M6 for 63A)
Applicable
wire size:1.6mm-dia.to 22mm 2
Mounting hole
Sensitivity current
selector
24
Breaker
φ5.5
(6.5mm-diameter for 63A)
φ8.5
φ4.5
6
111
130
84
50
111
Trip button
22
50
75
Test button
Leakage
indicaton button
45
61
68
12.5 max.
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
25
M4×0.7 taps
or 5mm dia.hole
4
72
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Drilling plan
90
Rear connection
Mounting panel
t=3.2max
Insulation tube
Breaker
Breaker
8
111
R1
52
8
111
27 min.
M6 screw
50
M4×0.7 screw
for mounting breaker
25
50
φ14
M4×0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia.hole
70
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.
68
72
42
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
M5×0.8
terminal block mounting screw
80
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting panel
3
50
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
15.5
5.5
11
83.5
85
180
111
16.5 max.
Center line of
breaker body
7
54
54 80 54
10
21
89
30
M6 screw
φ6.5
25
82
6mm-dia.hole or
M5×0.8 taps
Details of terminal
Conductor drilling cutout
for direct connection
Cutout and drilling plan
Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
110

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV125-CW
NV125-HW
Type NV125-SW
NV125-SW
Type name NV125-CW NV125-SW NV125-HW
(15) 16 20 (30) (15) 16 20 (30)
63 (75) 80
Rated current In (Amp.)
32 40 50 (60) 63 32 40 50 (60)
100 125
(75) 80 100 (125) *1 63 (75) 80 100
Number of poles 3 3 4
3
4
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (2)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
*1: 3P only
Notes: (1) The time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
(2) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
30,100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
10/5
10/5
30/15
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 3pcs)
excluding models of NV125-CW
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
50/25
50/25
100/50
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
4h
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Types
NV125-CW 63A~100A
NV125-SW 40A~100A
NV125-HW 40A~100A
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Types
NV125-SW 16A~20A
NV125-HW 16A~20A
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Types
NV125-CW 125A
NV125-SW 125A
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Types
NV125-SW 32A
NV125-HW 32A
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max. (60A~100A)
Max. (40A~50A)
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
1s
1s
1s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking
time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking time
Operating time
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current
■Earth-Leakage Tripping
Characteristics
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay type
2s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Time-delay trip
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
AL AX UVT
MG EAL TBM
Instantaneous trip
6070
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
Lead wire
direction
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current
■Temperature Characteristics
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
–10
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Rated ambient
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Instantaneous trip
25
50 100 500 1000
25 50 100 5001000
25 50 100 5001000
25 50 100 5001000
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating
handle
Handle lock
device
F
S
V
R
F1SW
S1SW
V1SW (*1)
R1SW
55
57
54
58
LC
(*2)
HL
HL-S
Type name
LC-1SW
HLF-1SW
HLN-1SW
HLS-1SW
Reference
page
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*4) 69
Small TC-S TCS-1SW3W (*4)
Large TC-L TCL-1SW3W (*4)
Skeleton TTC TTC-1SW3(*4)
Rear BTC BTC-1SW3W (*4)
Plug-in PTC PTC-1SW3W (*4)
IEC 35mm rail
mounting adapters
Type name
Reference
page
60
DIN-1SW (*4) 70
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Line side
Magnetic
device
Test button
Senstivity
selector
ZCT
Load side
111
Electrical
operation device
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*2) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(*3) Specify the working voltage.
(*4) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
MDS-NV1SWE (*3)
61
Leakage
indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

Front connection
Mounting hole
50
CL
Sensitivity current
selector
CL
Insulation barrier
(removable)
Sensitivity current
selector
M8 screw
24
Solderless terminal
for wire size
14~2/0AWG CU/AL
CL
Breaker
CL
130
112
CL
Operating time
selector
(time-delay type)
Leakage
indication button
Operating time
selector
(time-delay type)
Leakage
indication button
84
50
Wire connection
CL
110-111
(*1)
Test button
Test button
Trip
button
22
Trip
button
30
Neutral pole
45
ø8.5
30
30
60
90
61
68
8
M4×0.7 taps
or 5mm-dia. hole
90
120
4 72
19 max.
3-pole
4-pole
3-pole
4-pole
90
(Conductor thickness
Drilling plan
t=5 max.)
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Rear connection
Mounting plate
t=3.2 max.
52
102
Mounting base
Stud rotatable
by 90°
4-pole
3-pole
LC
Breaker
LC
4-pole
3-pole LC
LC
Breaker
LC
Connection
allowance
15
16
112
8
LC
(*1) 110-111
112
LC
R1
52
30
30
φ18
30
28
8.5
68
72
2.5
15
54.5
104.5
2.5
15
M8 bolt
5
60
90
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting screw
Insulation
tube
60
3-pole
90
M4×0.7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
Drilling plan
4-pole
86
1.0mm clearance on each side
of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
4-pole
M5×0.8
Terminal block mounting screw
125
Mounting plate
90
Breaker (plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in terminal block
30
CL
CL
5.5 20
CL
11
98
190
134
16.5 max.
LC
54
94 56
56
12
12.5
Details of terminal
21
89
30
M8 screw
60
95
3-pole
φ8.5
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
30
97
3-pole
60
127
4-pole
6mm-dia. hole
or M5×0.8 taps
Drilling plan
Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 110 and 111 both sides.
Remarks: (1) NV125-CW is available in 3-pole only.
(2) In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
112

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV250-CW
NV250-HW
Type NV250-SW
NV250-SW
Type name NV250-CW NV250-SW NV250-HW
125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175 125 150 175
Rated current In (Amp.)
200 225 250 200 225 250 200 225 200 225
Number of poles 3 3 4
3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
100–440
Multi-voltage type
30, 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
30, 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
30, 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.04 0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
15/8
18/9
35/18
100–440 200–440 100–440 200–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
4
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
50/13
50/13
100/25
■Operating Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1
1.3
Min.
■Internal Accessories
250A
Types
NV250-CW
NV250-SW
NV250-HW
Max.
125~
225A
Max.total
breaking time
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of rated current
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
25 50 100 500 1000
■Temperature Characteristics
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
UVT
MG EAL TBM
Lead wire
direction
Curreny rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
Remark: (*1) refer to page 44.
■External Accessories
(*1)
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Accessories
Operating
handle
Handle lock
device
F
S
V
R
F2SW
S2SW
V2SW (*1)
R2SW
55
57
54
58
LC
(*2)
HL
HL-S
Type name
LC-2SW
HLF-2SW
HLN-2SW
HLS-2SW
Reference
page
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Ml
Type name
Ml-05SW3 (*3) 69
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*3)
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*3)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*3)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*3)
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*3)
Reference
page
60
Line side
Magnetic
device
Test button
Senstivity
selector
ZCT
Load side
Electrical
operation device
MDS-NV2SWE (*4)
61
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter "F" to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(*3) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*4) Specify the working voltage.
(*5) NV250-HW model cannot be produced.
Leakage
indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
113

Front connection
Mounting hole
Trip button
LC
CL
22
70
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Sensitivity
selector
Operating time
selector
(for time-delay
type)
Leakage
indication
button
Test button
CL
35
105
144
100 165
100
Neutral
pole
102
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
50
φ8.5
24
45
61
68
φ4.5
30
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125~175A 14~95mm 2
200~250A 70~125mm 2
Wire connection
23 max.
φ8.5
10
LC
LC
35
Breaker
35
M4×0.7 screw
or φ5
CL
126
105 140
4 72
(Bus t max.=7)
3-pole
4-pole
92
Bus drilling for
direct connection
Drilling plan
3-pole
4-pole
Rear connection
4-pole
Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
Insulating tube
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
LC
Breaker
LC
3-pole
CL
LC
Breaker
LC
Connection
allowance
144
8
CL
126
144
CL
R1
52
22
20
15
6
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting screw
ø24
35
32.5
68
72
71
106
15
φ9
M8 bolt
70
105
Insulating
tube
35
70
3-pole
M4×0.7
screw
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
105
4-pole
100
1mm clearance
on each side
of handle
Front-plate cutout
6
Plug-in
200
Mounting plate
LC
Plug-in terminal block
14
6
28 144
34.5
70
15
Connection
allowance
22
LC
153
CL
CL
Breaker (Terminal block)
LC
54
58.5 80 58.5
18
86
32
M6
Terminal block
mounting screw
Stud attachable in this
direction only
20
70
φ9
M8 bolt
Insulating barrier
70
107
3-pole
φ7
105
142
4-pole
Drilling plan
Remarks: (1) NV250-CW are available in 3-pole only.
(2) In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
114

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV250-SEW NV250-HEW
Type NV250-SEW
■Operating Characteristics
Type name NV250-SEW NV250-HEW
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 3 4 3 4
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
125–225
Adjustable
100–440 100–440
Multi-voltage type Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.04 0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
25/13
30/15
50/25
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
125–225
Adjustable
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
50/13
50/13
100/25
Mounting screw:
M4×0.7×55 (3P: 2pcs, 4P: 4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pc, 4P: 6pcs)
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Pre-alarm
pickup current IP
Ir ×(0.70-0.75
-0.8-0.85-0.9
-0.95-1.0) ±10%
Pre-alarm
operating time TP
TP = TL ±20%
2
(at 200%)
0.6
0.7
INST pickup current Il
In×(4~16) ±15%
1 1.3 3 2 4
Note) Instantaneous tripping current (×100% of In)
LTD operating time TL
12-60-80-100s ±20%
(at 200%)
×100% of Current setting
Types
NV250-SEW NV250-HEW
Note)
Current setting Ir Rated current In
125~225A 225A
(Adjustable)
STD pickup current Is
Ir ×(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
Max.total breaking
time
5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
25 50 100 500 1000
Rated current sensitivity
Time-delay type
0.45s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
Remark: (*1) refer to page 44.
AL AX UVT
MG EAL TBM
(*1)
PAL
Lead wire
direction
■Temperature Characteristics
Derating of Load current (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
Rated ambient
-10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Accessories
Operating
handle
Handle lock
device
Type name
Reference
page
F
S
V
R
F2SW
S2SW
V2SW (*1)
R2SW
55
57
54
58
LC
(*2)
HL
HL-S
LC-2SW
HLF-2SW
HLN-2SW
HLS-2SW
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Type name
Ml Ml-05SW3 (*3) 69
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*3)
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*3)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*3)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*3)
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*3)
Electrical
operation device
MDS-NVE2SWE (*4)
Reference
page
60
61
Magnetic
device
Line side
Magnetic
device
Characteristic
setting part
CT
CT
CT
Test button
ZCT
Sensitivity
selector
Load side
115
Notes: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
(*3) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*4) Specify the working voltage.
(*5) NV250-HEW model cannot be produced.
Leakage
indication button

Front connection
Insulating barrier
(removable)
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
24
Note: The setting of selector is available by openning the upper cover.
Mounting hole
Trip
button
Test
cover
22
70
Leakage indicator
button
Current indication LED
OVER
PAL
70%
Sensitivity selector
Operating
time selector
(for time-delay type)
Test button
Operating
characteristics
selector
35
105
144
165 100
100
Neutral
pole
102 (upper cover)
50
φ8.5
68
45
61
ø4.5
30
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125 175A 14 95mm 2
200 225A 70 125mm 2
Wire connection
23max.
ø8.5
10
35
Breaker
M4×0.7 taps
or φ5
35
126
105
3-pole
140
4-pole
4 72
92
(Bus t max.=7)
Bus drilling for
direct connection
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
Rear connection
Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
Insulating
tube
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Connection
allowance
144
8
126
144
R1
52
22
20
68
72
15
71
106
15
φ9
M8 bolt
6
70
105
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting screw
Insulating
tube
35
70
3-pole
ø24
M4×0.7
taps
or φ5
Drilling plan
35
35
105
4-pole
100
1mm clearance
on each side
of handle
Front-plate cutout
32.5
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal
block
Breaker (Terminal block)
200
14
6
28 144
34.5
70
15
Connection
allowance
22
153
54
80 58.5
58.5
18
86
32
M6
Terminal block
mounting screw
20
Stud attachable in this
derection only
70
φ9
M8 bolt
Insulating
barrier
70
φ7
107
3-pole
Drilling plan
105
142
4-pole
116

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV125-RW
Type name NV125-RW
Type NV125-RW
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (2)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
(15) 16 20 (30) 32 40
50 (60) 63 (75) 80 100
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
125/125
125/125
125/125
Mounting screw : M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier : (3P:4pcs, 4P:6pcs)
Notes : (1) The Time-delayed types will be produced when they have the current specifications of 20A or more.
(2) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
4h
2h
2h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Type
NV125-RW 16A~32A
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Type
NV125-RW 40A~100A
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Type
NV125-RW 32A
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.(60A~100A)
Max. (40A~50A)
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
1s
1s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking
time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
breaking time
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
6070
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
×100% of Rated current
■Earth-Leakage Tripping
Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
AL
AX
UVT
MG EAL TBM
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
Lead wire
direction
■Temperature Characteristics
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
Rated ambient
100
90
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Ambient temperature (°C)
60
25
50 100 500 1000
25 50 100 5001000
25 50 100 5001000
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
25 50 100 5001000
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Mechanical interlock
F F1UW
55
S
V
S1SW
V1UW
57
54
R R1UW
58
MI
Electrical operation device
Type name
MI-05SW3 (*1)
—
Reference
page
69
—
Terminal cover
Accessories
Small
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Plug-in
Handle lock
device
TC-S
TC-L
TTC
BTC
(*2)
HL
HL-S
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF and HLS types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Type name
TCS-1SW3W (*1)
TCL-1SW3W (*1)
TTC-1SW3 (*1)
BTC-1SW3W (*1)
PTC PTC-1SW3W (*1)
LC LC-1SW
HLF-1SW
HLN-1SW
HLS-1SW
Reference
page
60
70
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Line side
Magnetic
device
Leakage
indication button
Test button
Senstivity
selector
ZCT
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
Load side
117

Front connection
191
130
61
173
Mounting hole
CL
CL
Sensitivity current
selector
Operating time
selector
(time-delay type)
Leakage
indication button
84
M8 screw
50
24
φ8.5
8
CL
LC
Breaker
171-172
(*1)
Test button
Trip
button
22
60
90
45
61
68
19 max.
(Conductor thickness t=5 max.)
30
M4×7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
4
72
Conductor drilling for direct connection
90
Drilling plan
Rear connection
Mounting plate
t=3.2 max.
102
52
Stud rotatble
by 90°
CL
Breaker
LC
Breaker
CL
Mounting base
Connection
15 allowance
16
173
CL
8
CL
171-172
(*1)
173
LC
R1
4.5
52
8.5
68
72
2.5
15
54.5
104.5
2.5
15
M8 bolt
5 60
M4×0.7
60
breaker
mounting screw
Insulation
tube
30
Drilling plan
φ18
M4×7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
86
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
M5×0.8
Terminal block mounting screw
Breaker
(plug-in terminal block)
Plug-in terminal
block
CL
LC
LC
11
159
251
LC
195
5.5
20
16.5 max.
12
LC
115
56 155
56
21
89
30
M8 screw
60
95
12.5
φ8.5
30
97
6mm-dia. hole
or M5×0.8 taps
Details of terminal
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Drilling plan
Note: (*1) It can respond to the attachment size of 171 and 172 both sides.
Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
118

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV250-RW
Type name NV250-RW
Type NV250-RW
Rated current In (Amp.)
Number of poles 3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1)
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC 60947-2 (Icu/Ics)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Standard Attached Parts (Front connection)
AC440V
AC400V
AC230V
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V
125 150 175
200 225
100–440
Multi-voltage type
(30) 100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.04
100 • 200 • 500
Selectable
0.45 • 1.0 • 2.0
Selectable
(0.1 • 0.5 • 1.0)
Button
125/125
125/125
125/125
Mounting screw : M4 × 0.7 × 55 (2pcs),
M4 × 0.7 × 73 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier : (4pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Min.
Type
NV250-RW
Max.
Max.total
breaking time
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s(MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.3 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
25 50 100 500 1000
25 50 100 5001000
25 50 100 5001000
Ground-fault current (% of rated current sensitivity)
■Ambient Compensating Curve
25 50 100 5001000
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL AX UVT MG EAL TBM
Lead wire
direction
Curreny rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
Remark: (1) refer to page 44.
■External Accessories
80
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F
S
V
F2UW
S2SW
V2UW
55
57
54
R R2UW
58
LC
(*2)
HL
HL-S
Type name
LC-2SW
HLF-2SW
HLN-2SW
HLS-2SW
Reference
page
70
Terminal cover
Accessories
Mechanical
interlock
Type name
MI MI-05SW3 (*1)
Small TC-S TCS-2SW3W (*1)
Large TC-L TCL-2SW3W (*1)
Skeleton TTC TTC-2SW3 (*1)
Rear BTC BTC-2SW3W (*1)
Plug-in PTC PTC-2SW3W (*1)
Electrical
operation device
Reference
page
69
60
— —
Line side
Magnetic
device
Test button
Senstivity
selector
ZCT
Load side
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
(*2) HLF types are used for OFF-lock, and HLN types for ON-lock.
Leakage
indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
119

Front connection
100 240
100
Mounting hole
165 75
219
Trip
Button
CL
CL
22
70
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Sensitivity selector
Operating time selector
(for time-delay type)
Leakage indication
button
Test button
165 75
M8 bolt
(Hex-socket)
28
102
50
φ8.5
45
61
68
24
φ4.5
Solderless terminal
for wire size
125~175A 14~95mm 2
200~225A 70~125mm 2
Wire connection
23 max
φ8.5
10
(Bus t max.=7)
LC
LC
35
Drilling plan
Breaker
201
M4×0.7 screw
or φ5
105
4
72
92
Bus drilling for
direct connection
Rear connection
Mounting plate
t max.=3.2
Insulating
tube
Stud can be
rotated 90°
CL
Breaker
CL
Breaker
73
108
LC
LC
11.5
CL
Connection
219
8
CL
201
219
R1
52
allowance
22
20
68
72
15
71
106
15
φ9
M8 bolt
6
70
M4×0.7
breaker
mounting screw
Insulating
tube
35
70
Drilling plan
ø24
M4×0.7
screw
or φ5
100
1mm clearance
on each side
of handle
Front-plate cutout
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal
block
34.5
LC
CL
Breaker (Terminal block)
275
CL
14
219
70
15
Connection
allowance
22
CL
28
58.5
129
155 58.5
6
153
18
86 32
M6
Terminal block
mounting screw
Stud attachable in this
direction only
20
70
φ9
M8 bolt
Insulating
barrier
70
107
Drilling plan
φ7
Remark: In case of the CE marking, outside sizes differ.
120

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV400-CW
NV400-SW
Type NV400-SW
Type name
NV400-CW NV400-SW
Number of poles
3
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (1)
100-440 Multi-voltage type
Rated current In (Amp.)
250 300 350 400
High-speed Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) (30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
0.04
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA) (100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
Time-delay
type
Max. operating time at 2I∆n (s) (0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
Inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
(0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Earth-leakage indication system
Button
Rated short-circuit
440V
25/13
42/42
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2
AC 400V
36/18
45/45
(lcu/lcs)
230V
50/25
85/85
Standard Attached Parts
Mounting screw: M6×60 (4pcs)
(Front connection)
Insulation barrier: (4pcs)
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
■Operating Characteristics
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
4h
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Min.
Types
NV400-CW
NV400-SW
Max.
NV400-CW
NV400-SW
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total breaking time
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
500
25 100 1000
50 500
25 100 1000
50
50 500
25 100 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s
0.01s
100
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current (×100% of rated current)
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL AX SHT or UVT MG
EAL
TBM
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Reference ambient
temperature
80
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: (1) refer to page 46 and 47.
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Type name
Reference
page
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Test button
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SWNV
S4CW, S4SW
V4SWNV,V4SWFNV
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4CW, HT-4SW
55
57
54
69
70
Large
Skeleton
Rear
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3
(TTC) TTC-4SW3
(BTC) BTC-4SW3
Handle
lock device
HL
HL-S
HL-4CW, HL-4SW
HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device
Notes: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
Terminal cover
60
70
61
Line side
Magnetic
device
Sensitivity
selector
ZCT
Load side
Leakage indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
121

Front connection
110
Insulating barrier (removable)
28
16
43
Conductor thickness
t=8 max.
94.5
44
8
LC
Breaker
LC
Breaker
Mounting hole
LC
Trip button
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector
(Time-delay type)
Leakage indication button
Test button
257
102 39
39
ø12.5
47
ø7
25
12
ø10.5
LC
194
LC
R6
92
51
112
140
ø14
M12 bolt
5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
44 Conductor drilling for direct connection
97
103
107
155(NV400-SP)
134(NV400-CP)
44
Drilling plan
M6 tap or ø7
118
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
Front-panel cutout
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°C
Breaker
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
LC
8
Line side
6-ø35
8
24
LC
Connection
allowance
25 20 20
225
265
24
14
M6 tap or ø7
LC
194
225
194
225
4-M6 tap or ø7
113
10
26
ø13 M12 bolt
128
83
8
87
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
Insulation tube
44
87
ø35
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
Drilling plan
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
6
Plug-in
280
Plug-in terminal block
LC
24
Mounting plate
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
35
225
Connection allowance
LC
LC
LC
Breaker
135
163 55
121
18
8
28
160
79
15
24
28
ø13 M12 bolt
87
Stud attachable in
this direction only
Insulating barrier
ø10
44
136
55
Drilling plan
122

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV400-SEW
NV400-HEW
NV400-REW
Type NV400-SEW
Type name
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speed
type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Time-delay
type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
440V
400V
230V
NV400-SEW NV400-HEW NV400-REW
3 4 3 4 3
42/42
50/50
85/85
100-440 Multi-voltage type
200-400 adjustable
(30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
0.04
(100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
(0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Button
65/65
70/70
100/100
Standard Attached Parts
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
(Front connection)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
Note: (1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
125/63
125/63
150/75
■Operating Characteristics
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Operating time
10h
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x (0.70-0.75-0.8-
0.85-0.9-0.95
-1.0) ±10%
LTD operating time
at 125%
1000s (TL=150s set)
670s (TL=100s set)
400s (TL= 60s set)
80s (TL= 12s set)
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Types
NV400-SEW
NV400-HEW
NV400-REW
Current setting Rated current
Ir: 200-400A In: 400A
(Adjustable)
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Is
Ir x (2-2.5-3-3.5-4-
5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
Highspeed
type
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20% 2
(at 200%)
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06 s
0.2 ± 0.04 s
0.1 ± 0.03 s
0.06 ± 0.02 s
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
500
25 100 1000
50 500
25 100 1000
50
50 500
25 100 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s
0.01s
INST pickup current II
x 4 ~ x16 ±15%
(Magnification to In)
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
Current setting (% to Ir)
Instantaneous tripping current (% to In)
Max. total
breaking time
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM
PAL
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SWNV
S4SW
V4SWNV,V4SWFNV
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*2)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
Note: (*1) This is for NV400-SEW.
(*2) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
TI
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Reference
page
55
57
54
69
70
Terminal cover
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Lead wire
direction
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
(2) refer to page 46 and 47.
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1) (*2)
(TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*2)
(BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1) (*2)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
Reference
page
60
70
61
■Current reducing curve
Continuous load current (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
Rated ambient
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Magnetic
device
N
Line side
Magnetic
device
Characteristic
setting part
CT
CT
CT
Test button
ZCT
Sensitivity
selector
In case of 4P
Load side
123
Leakage indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

Front connection
110
Mounting hole
LC
Trip button
51
112
140
3-pole
Rear connection
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivity current
selector
Operating time selector
(Time-delay type)
Leakage indication
button
Test button
ø14
M12 bolt
Mounting plate
LC
56
168
185
196
4-pole
Stud can be
rotated 90°C
28
16
Conductor thickness
t=8 max.
43
257
Neutral pole
3-pole
102 39
39
4-pole
8
94.5
ø12.5
ø7
44
97
103
5 107
155
44
59
C
Breaker
L
LC Breaker
LC
LC
LC
25
44 M6 tap or ø7 44
118
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
3-pole
4-pole
Front-panel cutout
Drilling plan
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Line side
Breaker Groove for reducing
LC heat by overcurrent C L
6-ø35
12
ø10.5
Conductor thickness t=8 max.
Conductor drilling for direct connection
8
194
8
R6
4-pole
3-pole
24
92
Connection
allowance
M6 tap or ø7
LC
25 20 20
225
265
14
LC
194
225
24
4-M6 tap or ø7
194
225
113
10
26
ø13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
87
130.5
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
Insulation tube
44 ø35 44
87
43.5
130.5
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal block
Mounting plate
35
4-pole
3-pole
LC
LC
Breaker
LC
280
LC
24
M8 terminal block
mounting screw
225
Connection
allowance
LC
135
163 55
121
18
8
28
160
79
15
24
28
ø13
M12 bolt
87
130.5
Stud attachable
in this direction only
Insulating barrier
ø10
44 87
136
181
3-pole
4-pole
55
Drilling plan
124

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV630-CW
NV630-SW
Type NV630-SW
Type name
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speed
type
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Time-delay
type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
AC
440V
400V
230V
NV630-CW NV630-SW
3
100-440 Multi-voltage type
500 600 630
100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
0.04
100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Button
36/18
42/42
36/18
50/50
50/25
85/85
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (4pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
4h
2h
Operating time
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Min.
Types
NV630-CW NV630-SW
Max.
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total breaking time
25 50 500
100 1000
500
25 100 1000
50 500
25 100 1000
50
50 500
25 100 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02s
0.01s
100 125
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL AX SHT or UVT MG
EAL
TBM
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Reference ambient
temperature
80
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: (1) refer to page 46 and 47.
■External Accessories
External Accessories (An order for
Accessories
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SWWNV
S4SW
V4SW, V4SWF
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Reference
page
55
57
54
69
70
Large
Skeleton
Rear
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3
(TTC) TTC-4SW3
(BTC) BTC-4SW3
Handle
lock device
HL
HL-S
HL-4SW
HLS-4SW
Electrical operation device
Terminal cover
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
60
70
61
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Line side
Magnetic
device
Test button
Sensitivity
selector
ZCT
Load side
Leakage indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
125

Front connection
94.5
110
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Sensitivity
selector
28
16
43
Bus t max.=10
39
8
44
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Mounting
hole
Trip
button
51
112
140
Operating-time
selector
(time-delay type)
Leakage-indicator
button
Test button
ø14
M12 bolt
56
168
185
196
257
Neutral
Pole
102
39
ø12.5
97
103
5 107
155
59
ø7
44
30
12
Bus t max.=10
ø10.5
Bus drilling for
direct connection
44
M6 screw
or ø7
44
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
194
R6
118
1mm clearance on each
side of handle
Front-plate cutout
92
3-pole
4-pole
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting
plate
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Eddy-current
heat-reducing slit
8
Line side
6-ø35
Connection
allowance
25 20 20
225
265
14
M6 screw
or ø7
194
225
24
194
225
113
10
32
ø13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
M6
breaker mounting
87
screw
Insulated tube
44
87
130.5
ø35
44
43.5
130.5
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal
block
Mounting plate
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
35
8
24
4-M6 tap or ø7
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
280
M8
terminal block
25 Mounting screw
10
28 225
Connection
allowance
160
93
25
ø10
135
163 55
55
18
121
20
ø13
M12 bolt
30
110
165.5
Stud attachable in
this direction only
Insulating barrier
44 87
136 181
3-pole
4-pole
Note: NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-HEW is only the pole of 3.
Drilling plan
126

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV630-SEW
NV630-HEW
Type NV630-SEW
Type name
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC) (*1)
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speed Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Time-delay
type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2
(Icu/Ics)
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
AC
440V
400V
230V
Notes: (*1) Rated operational voltage of time-delay type is for 200-440V.
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW
3 4 3
100-440 Multi-voltage type
42/42
50/50
85/85
300-630 adjustable
(30) 100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
0.04
(100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
(0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable)
(0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0)
Button
65/65
70/70
100/100
Mounting screw: M6×72 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (3P: 4pcs, 4P: 6pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Operating time
Pre-alarm
pickup current Ip
Ir x(0.7-0.75-0.8-0.85
-0.9-0.95-1.0)±10%
INST pickup current II
In x(4~15) ±15%
(Magnification to In)
LTD operating time TL
12-60-100-150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Isd
Ir x(2-2.5-3-3.5-4
-5-6-7-8-10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
Max.total
breaking time
70 60 125 100 300
700
200 400 3000
500 600 1000 1500 2000 4000
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
■External Accessories
(An order for
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Accessories
Pre-alarm
operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20% 2
(at 200%)
Current (% to Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In)
Types
NV630-SEW NV630-HEW
AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM
PAL
Type name
Operating handle
F
S
V
F4SWNV
S4SW
V4SWF, V4SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-4SW3 (*1)
Auxiliary handle (HT) HT-4SW
LTD operating time
at-125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
570s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Note: (*1) The designation depends on the number of poles. Refer to the reference page.
TI
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
Reference
page
55
57
54
69
70
Terminal cover
Current setting
Ir:300~630A
(Adjustable)
Large
Skeleton
Rear
Handle
lock device
Accessories
Electrical operation
device
Rated Current
In:630A
Lead wire
direction
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
(2) refer to page 46 and 47.
Type name
(TC-L) TCL-4SW3 (*1)
(TTC) TTC-4SW3 (*1)
(BTC) BTC-4SW3 (*1)
HL HL-4SW
HL-S HLS-4SW
Operating time
Reference
page
60
70
61
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
25 50 500
100 1000
500
25 100 1000
50 500
25 100 1000
50
50 500
25 100 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
■Current reducing curve
Continuous load current (%)
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Magnetic
device
N
Line side
Magnetic
device
130
120
110
100
90
80
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Characteristic
setting part
CT
CT
CT
Rated nonoperating current
Rated ambient
Time-delay type
1s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Test button
ZCT
Sensitivity
selector
Rated nonoperating current
In case of 4P
Time-delay type
2s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Load side
127
Leakage indication button
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.

Front connection
94.5
110
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Sensitivity
selector
28
16
43
Bus t max.=10
39
8
44
Breaker
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Mounting
hole
Trip
button
51
112
140
Operating-time
selector
(time-delay type)
Leakage-indicator
button
Test button
ø14
M12 bolt
56
168
185
196
257
Neutral
Pole
102
39
ø12.5
97
103
5 107
155
59
ø7
44
30
12
Bus t max.=10
ø10.5
Bus drilling for
direct connection
44
M6 screw
or ø7
44
3-pole
4-pole
Drilling plan
194
R6
118
1mm clearance on each
side of handle
Front-plate cutout
92
3-pole
4-pole
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Mounting
plate
Stud can be
rotated 90°
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
Eddy-current
heat-reducing slit
8
Line side
6-ø35
Connection
allowance
25 20 20
225
265
14
M6 screw
or ø7
194
225
24
194
225
113
10
32
ø13
M12 bolt
128
83
8
M6
breaker mounting
87
screw
Insulated tube
44
87
130.5
ø35
44
43.5
130.5
3-pole
Drilling plan
4-pole
6
Plug-in
Plug-in terminal
block
Mounting plate
4-pole
3-pole
Breaker
35
8
24
4-M6 tap or ø7
11 11
44
87
24 24
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
Load side
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
280
M8
terminal block
25 Mounting screw
10
28 225
Connection
allowance
160
93
25
ø10
135
163 55
55
18
121
20
ø13
M12 bolt
30
110
165.5
Stud attachable in
this direction only
Insulating barrier
44 87
136 181
3-pole
4-pole
Note: NV630-CW, NV630-SW, NV630-HEW is only the pole of 3.
Drilling plan
128

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
NV800-SEW
NV800-HEW
Type NV800-SEW
Type name
Number of poles
Rated operational voltage Ue (V AC)
Rated current In (Amp.)
High-speed
type
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Time-delay
type
Max. operating time at 5I∆n (s)
Max. inertial non-operating time at 2I∆n (s)
Earth-leakage indication system
Rated short-circuit
440V
breaking capacity (kA)
IEC60947-2
AC 400V
(Icu/Ics)
230V
Standard Attached Parts
(Front connection)
NV800-SEW
NV800-HEW
3
100-440 Multi-voltage type
400-800 adjustable
(100 · 200 · 500 Selectable)
(0.04)
100 · 200 · 500 Selectable
0.45 · 1.0 · 2.0 Selectable
0.1 · 0.5 · 1.0
Button
42/42
65/65
50/50
70/70
85/85
100/100
Mounting screw: M6×35 (4pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2pcs)
■Operating Characteristics
10h
■Earth-Leakage Tripping Characteristics
Operating time
5h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s Pre-alarm pickup current Ip
Ir × (0.7 – 0.75 – 0.8 – 0.85
2s – 0.9 – 0.95 – 1.0) ±10%
1s
0.5s
0.2s
Pre-alarm operating time Tp
TL
Tp= ±20%
2
(at 200%)
LTD operating time
at-125%
1000s(TL=150s set)
670s(TL=100s set)
400s(TL= 60s set)
80s(TL= 12s set)
Types
NV800-SEW NV800-HEW
Current setting
Ir:400~800A
(Adjustable)
Rated Current
In:800A
LTD operating time TL
12 – 60 – 100 – 150s ±20%
(at 200%)
STD pickup current Isd
Ir × (2 – 2.5 – 3 – 3.5 – 4
– 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 10) ±15%
STD operating time Ts
0.3 ± 0.06s
0.2 ± 0.04s
Operating time
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.04s
0.02s
0.01s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
Highspeed
type
25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
0.45s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
1s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000 25 50 100 500 1000
Ground-fault current Ground-fault current Ground-fault current
(×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity) (×100% of rated current sensitivity)
Rated nonoperating current
Time-delay type
2s. (MAX)
Rated current sensitivity
Inertial
nonoperating time
Current (% to Ir)
Instantaneous Tripping Current (% to In)
Max.total
breaking time
60 70 100 125 200 300 400 500 600 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
INST Pickup current Ii
In x(4~10) ±15%
(Magnification to In)
AL AX SHT or UVT MG EAL TBM
PAL
TI
0.1 ± 0.03s
0.06 ± 0.02s
Lead wire
direction
■Current reducing curve
Working current correcting ratio (%)
130
120
110 Reference ambient temperature
100
90
80
70
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
Remark: (1) Instead of EAL and TBM, pre-alarm module (PAL) or trip indicator (TI) can be attached.
(2) refer to page 46 and 47.
■External Accessories
(An order for
Accessories
Operating handle
should be placed at the same time as an order of circuit breaker main body.)
F
S
V
F8SWNV
S4SW
V8SWF, V8SW
Mechanical interlock (MI) MI-8SW3
Auxiliary handle
Type name
(HT) HT-4SW
Reference
page
55
57
54
69
70
Large
Skeleton
Rear
(TC-L) TCL-8SW3
(TTC) TTC-8SW3
(BTC) BTC-8SW3
Handle
lock device
HL
HL-S
HL-4SW
HLS-8SW
Electrical operation device
Terminal cover
Accessories
Type name
Reference
page
60
70
61
■Internal Wiring Diagram
Magnetic
device
Line side
Magnetic
device
Characteristic
setting part
CT
CT
CT
Leakage indication button
Test button
ZCT
Sensitivity
selector
Remark: In case of the CE marking, Internal wiring diagrams differ.
Load side
129

Front connection
110
87 275
87
Mounting hole
15 32 8
32
32
Trip button
51
14
40
140
210
Insulating barrier (removable)
Sensitivity current selector
Operating time selector
(Time-delay type)
Leakage indication button
Test button
Conductor thickness
t=12 max.
ø14
102
5
94.5
97
103
107
155
46
8
15
8
46
ø8
ø8.5
40
12
22
26
Terminal dimension for directly
connecting conductor
(Conductor thickness t=10 max.)
Conductor drilling for direct connection
70
Drilling plan
Breaker
243
M6 tap or ø7
R6
172
Front-panel cutout
92
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
Breaker
Rear connection
Boring dimensions for rear connection
type barriers (3-pole)
Connection
allowance
25
Mounting plate
Stud can be rotated 90°
M6 tap or ø7
Breaker
Groove for reducing heat by overcurrent
10 5
5
10
6-ø48
24 24
243
4-M6 tap or ø7
13
45
24 24
243
295
12.5
243
10
8 32 15
113 110
ø13
M12 bolt
8
140
M6 screw for
mounting breaker
70
140
ø48
11 11
70
140
8-M4 screw
Add these tapped holes in
8 positions to standard boring.
Drilling plan
Note: The bore dimensional drawing shows
the breaker viewed from the rear.
6
Plug-in
Mounting plate
Plug-in terminal block
Stud can be rotated 90°
Breaker
23
126
20
10
243
301
Connection allowance
25
M8 terminal block mounting screw
40
140
13
32 8
112
15
ø13
M12 bolt
70
208
155
ø10
56 187 56
Drilling plan
130

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF50-SWU
Type name
NF50-SWU
Rated current In (Amp.)
(3) 5 10 15 20
30 40 50
Number of poles 2
3
Rated short-circuit
braking capacity (kA)
UL489
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
Standard attached parts
Rated voltage (AC V)
AC
240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
500V
440V
400V
230V
240
14
600
7.5/4
7.5/4
7.5/4
15/8
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs)
Type NF50-SWU
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Type
NF50-SWU
Operating time
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Max.
2s
1s
Min.
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Temperature Characteristics
Left-side
mounting
2-pole
3-pole
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Operating time change rate (%)
300
250
200
150
100
80
70
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Rated ambient
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
Accessories Type name
Accessories
Type name
F05SWU2P
F
F05SWU Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
Operating handle
S S05SWU
V V05SWUF (*1) Terminal
Large TC-L TCL-05SWU2
cover
TCL-05SWU3
Handle lock device HL HLF-05SWU
Note: (*1) Adjustable types can be produced upon request.
131

R1
Front connection
CL
Mounting hole
LC
Insulation barrier
(removable)
M5×0.8 screw
(M6 for 63A)
24
φ5.5
6
50
12.5 max.
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max.)
CL
111
150
84
50
φ8.5
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Trip button
φ4.5
50
61
45
25 22
68
50
50
4
72
75
90
2-pole
3-pole
M4×0.7 taps or 5mm dia.hole
LC
LC
Breaker
LC
LC
Breaker
LC
111
LC
52
25
50
70
2-pole
Drilling plan
3-pole
2-pole
Front-panel cutout
3-pole
1.0mm clearance on each side of
the handle frame.
6
132

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF100-CWU
NF100-SWU
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
NF100-CWU
50 60
75 100
NF100-SWU
15 20 30 40
50 60
75 100
Number of poles 2 3 2 3
Rated voltage (AC V)
240
480Y/277
UL 489
480Y/277V
–
22
AC
240V
10
35
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 600
690
690V
–
8/4
IEC 60947-2
500V
7.5/4
18/9
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
AC
440V
400V
10/5
10/5
25/13
30/15
230V
30/15
50/25
DC
250V
7.5/4
15/8
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacities (kA)
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier: (2P: 2pcs, 3P: 4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Type NF100-SWU
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
2h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Types
NF100-CWU 50A~100A
NF100-SWU 40A~100A
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Type
NF100-SWU 15A~30A
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max. (60A~100A)
Max. (40A,50A)
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
1s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40 50 6070
×100% of Rated current
×100% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
2-pole
3-pole
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
80
–10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Type name
Accessories
Type name
F
F1SWU2P
F1SWU Mechanical interlock Ml Ml-05SWU3
S S1SWU
V V1SWU (*1) Terminal
Large TC-L TCL-1SWU2
cover
TCL-1SWU3
HL HLF-1SWU
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
133

Front connection
(Standard)
CL
Insulation barrier
(removable)
φ8.5
150 50
112
CL
Mounting
hole
CL
LC
84
M8 screw
50
24
(Conductor thickness
t=5 max)
19 max.
8
Conductor drilling
for direct connection
Trip
button
45
50
30
60
22
60
90
61
68
4 72
90
2-pole
3-pole
Front connection (Solderless terminal)
(Option)
Solderless terminal
LC
CL
5.03
LC
LC
Hexagon socket set screw
wire size
14~1/0AWG CU/AL
2-pole
3-pole
6
2-pole
3-pole
62
CL
LC
Breaker
CL
LC
Breaker
30
30
CL
CL
110-111
CL
LC
R 1
52
(Insulation plate)
(Line)
2-pole
30
3-pole
M4×0.7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
57
1.0mm clearance on each
side of the handle frame.
86
CAUTION:
When mounted in steel or cast box
cover must be insulated as shown.
30mm air gap to cover or
0.8mm fibre insulating plate
extending 12.7mm out from
each side of breaker.
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
134

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF225-CWU
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
NF225-CWU
125 150 175
200 225
Number of poles 3
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacities (kA)
UL 489
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
Standard attached parts
Rated voltage (AC V)
AC
240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
DC
500V
440V
400V
230V
250V
240
35
600
10/5
15/8
18/9
35/18
10/5 (*1)
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×55 (2pcs)
Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Terminal cover: (1 set), (*2)
Type NF225-CWU
Notes: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can
be used for up to 400 V DC.
(*2) The standard configuration contains a protection cover and adopts the IP20 (finger
protection) structure.
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
Type
NF225-CWU
Operating time
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Max.
2s
Min.
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Max. total
breaking
time
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
1 1.35
2 3
4
5 6 7 10 15 20 30
40
×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Curreny rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
80
–10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F
F2SWU
S S2SWU
V V2SWU (*1)
HL
Type name
HLF-2SWU
Terminal
cover
Accessories
Mechanical interlock
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
Ml
Type name
MI-05SWU3
Large TC-L TCL-2SWU3
135

Front connection
Mounting hole
LC
Trip button
LC
Insulating barrier
144
100 165
100
102
M8 bolt
(Hex-soket)
50
φ8.5
24
φ4.5
22
70
105
45
61
68
4 72
92
CL
Breaker
LC
Breaker
CL
126
CL
R1
52
φ8.5
10
22 max.
Bus t max.=7
35
Drilling plan
M4×0.7 screw
or φ5
100
Front cover cutout
1mm clearance on
each side of handle
Bus drilling for
direct connection
6
136

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF-SFW
NF-SJW
NF-HJW
Type name NF-SFW NF-SJW NF-HJW
Rated current In (Amp.)
at ambient temperature 40°C (IEC30°C)
15 20 30 40
50 60 70 80
90 100 110
125 150
(125) (150) 175
200 225 250
125 150 175
200 225 250
Number of poles 3 3 3
Rated voltage (AC V)
600Y/347 600Y/347 600Y/347
UL 489
600Y/347V
14
14
18
AC
480V
35
35
50
240V
65
65
100
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
690
690
690
690V
8/8
8/8
15/15
IEC 60947-2
500V
30/30
30/30
36/36
JIS C 8201-2
440V
36/36
36/36
50/50
AC
(Icu/Ics)
400V
36/36
36/36
50/50
230V
85/85
85/85
100/100
DC
250V (*1) 20/20
20/20
20/20
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacities (kA)
Mounting screw: M4×0.7×73 (4pcs)
Standard attached parts
Insulation barrier: (4pcs),
Insulation board: (1pc)
Note: (*1) Use either two poles. When wired as shown at the bottom of page 26, the models can be used for up to 500 V DC.
Type NF-SFW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
4h
4h
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Type
NF-SFW
15A~40A
Max.(40A)
Max.(15A~30A)
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.(60A~150A)
Max.(50A)
Type
NF-SFW
50A~150A
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
Max.
Type
NF-SJW/HJW
125A~250A
Instantaneous trip
adjustment range
Position AC
of notch x In (%)
4 400±80
6 600
8 800
10 1000±200
2s
2s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Max. total
breaking
time
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
(60A~150A)
(50A)
Max. total
breaking
time
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Adjustable range
Max. total
breaking
time
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
0.02s
0.01s
1
1.35
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
40
0.02s
Time-delay trip
0.01s
1 1.35 2 3
4
Instantaneous trip
5 6 7 10 15 20 30
40
×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current ×100% of Rated current
■Internal Accessories
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
AL AX
mounting
SHT or UVT
■External Accessories
Lead wire
direction
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
80
–10
0
Rated ambient
10 20 30 40
Ambient temperature (°C)
(rated ambient 40°C)
Remark: The reference ambient temperature for IEC
models is 30°C.
50
60
Accessories
Operating
handle
Handle
lock device
F
F2GSWU
S S2GSWU
V V2GSWU (*1)
HL
Type name
HLF-2GSWU
Terminal
cover
Accessories
Mechanical interlock
Ml
Type name
Ml-05SWU3
Large TC-L TCL-2GSWU3
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
137

Front connection
(Standard)
Mounting hole
LC
Insulating barrier
(removable)
50
Hex.socket head
M8 bolt
24
CAUTION:
Insulating barriers must be used
with uninsulated bus bars or
climp on terminals.
LC
144
185
112
50
φ8.5
φ4.5
10
24 max.
Trip button
50
ø8.5
22
(Conductor thickness t=7max.)
63
22
79
83
Bus bar drilling for
direct connection
35
4
86
4-FRONT
70
90
105
110
Front connection (Solderless terminal)
(Option)
Mounting hole
LC
Hexagon socket set screw
6.1
LC
144
185
112
50
Wire size
14AWG-250MCM CU/AL
Trip button
ø8.5
83
63
φ4.5
22
35
4
86
90
70
105
110
3-FRONT
6
LC
LC
Breaker
126
LC
LC
Breaker
R1
52
CAUTION:
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
26mm air gap to cover or extending 12.7mm
out fromeach side of breaker.
62
27
1.0mm clearance
26
on each side of
35
Drilling plan
M4×0.7 taps or
5mm-dia. hole
the handle frame.
100
Front-panel cutout
5-RIGHT
Insulation plate
(Line)
Outline and dimensions (mm (inch))
Type NF-SFW,NF-SJW,NF-HJW
138

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF-SKW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
at ambient temperature 40°C
NF-SKW
250 300
350 400
Number of poles 3
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacities (kA)
UL 489
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
Rated voltage (AC V)
AC
600Y/347V
480V
240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
600Y/347
20
35
65
690
10/10 (5/5) (*1)
30/30 (25/25) (*1)
42/42 (36/36) (*1)
45/45 (36/36) (*1)
85/85 (65/65) (*1)
Type NF-SKW
Notes: (*1) In case of solderless ter minal, interrupting capacity reduces: (/).
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Type
NF-SKW
2min
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
Min.
Max.
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max.total
interrupting time
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
600
% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side AL
mounting
NF-SKW
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
(*1)
(rated ambient 40°C)
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(*1)
■External Accessories
(*1) (*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
Type name
F F4SKW
S S4SKW
V V4SKW (*1)
HL HL-4SP
Ter minal
cover
Accessories
Type name
Large TC-L TCL-4SKW
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
139

Front connection (Solderless terminal)
Hexagon socket set screw
Solderless terminal
250~400A
Tightening torque
275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
Mounting
hole
8
Trip
button
225
257
102
φ12.5
φ7
47
UL
Ampere ratings
250A, 300A
250A
350A, 400A
Wire size
250-350MCM CU
350MCM AL
3/0AWG CU ONLY
87
140
97
103
IEC
Ampere ratings
Wire size (IEC 60228)
Class 2 Class 5
(max.141)
5
107
155
250A~350A 70~185mm 2 95~185mm 2
400A 150~240mm 2 150~185mm 2
Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×60 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
Front connection (Busbar terminal)
Insulating barrier
(removable)
46
110
26
13
Bus t max.
t10
10
Mounting
hole
257 44
102
Trip
button
φ12.5
φ7
47
φ13
6
Breaker
Breaker
CAUTION
97
30
58
10
46
112
140
(max.141)
5
97
103
107
Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×60 (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
155
R6
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
from each side of breaker.
194
92
44 7dia. holes
118
or M6 taps
1mm clearance on
each side of handle.
Insulating plate
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
(Line)
140

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
UL489 Listed Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
NF-SLW
Type name
Rated current In (Amp.)
at ambient temperature 40°C
NF-SLW
500 600
Number of poles 3
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacities (kA)
UL 489
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
Rated voltage (AC V)
AC
600Y/347V
480V
240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
690V
500V
440V
400V
230V
600Y/347
20
35
85
690
10/10
30/30
42/42
45/45
85/85
Type NF-SLW
■Operating Characteristics
4h
2h
Operating time
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Min.
Max.
Type
NF-SLW
Inst. trip adjustment
range (4 steps)
Control
setting
Lo
2
3
Hi
Inst. trip
current (%)
400±100
600
800
1000±200
Adjustable range
of inst. pick up
current
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Max. total
interrupting time
0.02s
Time-delay trip
Instantaneous trip
0.01s
100 135 200 300 400 500 700 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000
600
% of rated current
■Internal Accessories
■Ambient Compensating Curve
Left-side
mounting
Operating handle
Right-side
mounting
AL
AX
SHT or UVT
Lead wire
direction
Current rating (%)
130
120
110
100
90
Rated ambient
(*1) (*1)
(rated ambient 40°C)
80
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
(*1) (*1)
Note: (*1) Right-side mounting is standard of SHT and UVT. Specify separataly for
left-side mounting.
■External Accessories
Accessories
Operating handle
Handle lock device
F F6SLW
S S4SKW
V V6SLW (*1)
HL
Type name
HL-4SP
Ter minal
cover
Accessories
Note: (*1) Attach the letter “F” to the end of designation for a fixed type.
Type name
Large TC-L TCL-6SLW
141

Front connection (Solderless terminal)
Solderless termianl
Hexagon socket set screw
Mounting
hole
Tightening torque
275lb-in. (31.1N·m)
243
275
102
8
Trip
button
φ14
φ8
15
UL
Ampere ratings
Wire size
500A, 600A
250-500MCM CU ONLY
140
210
Note: Do not remove solderless terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×35 (4pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
97
103
5 107
155
IEC
Wire size (IEC 60228)
Ampere ratings
Class 2 Class 5
500A, 600A 95~185mm 2 120~185mm 2
Front connection (Busbar terminal)
Insulating barrier
(removable)
Bus t max.
t12
46
10
275
102
110
Mounting
hole
15
Trip
button
φ14
φ8
14
8
32
87
6
10
40
15
46
140
210
φ14
97
103
5
107
Note: Do not remove busbar terminal in any case.
Standard attached parts
Mounting screw:M6×35 (4pcs), Insulating barrier: (2pcs), Insulating plate: (1pc)
155
Breaker
R6
Breaker
CAUTION
When mounted in steel or cast box cover
must be insulated as shown.
58mm air gap to cover or 0.8mm fibre
insulating plate extending 12.7mm out
from each side of breaker.
243
92
97
30
58
70
7dia. holes
or M6 taps
172
1mm clearance on
each side of handle.
Insulating plate
Drilling plan
Front-panel cutout
(Line)
142

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Miniature Circuit Breakers
BH
BH-P
Type
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 40°C
1
70
BH
2
70, 100
3
70, 100
1
70
BH-P
2
70, 100
3
70, 100
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
Breaking
capacity
AC230/400V
IEC60898
AC400V
(kA) sym. — DC125V
3
—
230/400
125
1
—
3
3
—
230/400
125
1
—
3
Type BH
Type BH-P
■Operating Characteristics
■Ambient Compensating Curve
4h
Operating Characteristics
2h
Type:BH, BH-P
140
1h
Rated Current:70, 100A
Amb. temp.:40°C
135
30min
130
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
Current rating (%)
125
120
115
110
105
100
70, 100A
Rated ambient
30s
95
Operating time
20s
10s
5s
Max.
90
85
0 10 30 40
20 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
2s
Min.
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of rated current
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BH
Mtg bracket
M5 × 0.8 screw
(line side & load side)
73
95
57
32
95
100
113
•BH-P
57.5 7.5
M5 x 0.8
screw
Plug-in terminal
(line side)
71.5
74
Breaker
center
25
22
25
50
47
50
75
47
Mtg hole ø4.5
57.5
63.5
77.5
25 25 25
25 50
75
20.5
45.5
70.5
60.5
65.5
79
Mtg slot
Bus t max. =4
ø5.5
5.5
6
12
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole 13.5
Bus drilling
4.5
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.
and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole
14
143

BH-S
Type
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 40°C
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
Breaking
capacity
AC230/400V
IEC60898
AC400V
(kA) sym. — DC125V
1
5, 10, 15,
20, (25), 30,
40, 50, 60
230/400
—
3
—
—
BH-S M3
2 3
10, 15, 20,
(25), 30, 40,
50, 60
400
125
—
3
15, 20, (25),
30,40, 50,
60
400
—
1 —
1
5, 10, 15,
20, (25), 30,
40, 50, 60
230/400
—
6
—
—
BH-S M6
2 3
10, 15, 20,
(25), 30, 40,
50, 60
400
125
—
6
15, 20, (25),
30,40, 50,
60
400
—
1 —
Type BH-S
■Operating Characteristics
■Ambient Compensating Curve
4h
140
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Operating Characteristics
Type:BH-S
Rated Current:5~60A
Amb. temp.:40°C
Current rating (%)
135
130
125
120
115
110
105
100
95
10A
15-25A
30A
5A
40-60A
Rated ambient
1min
Max.
90
85
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
80
0 10 30 40
20 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Type B
Type C
Type D
6
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of rated current
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BH-S
Mtg bracket
M5 × 0.8 screw
(line side & load side)
32
73
95
57
95
100
113
25
25
50
50
75
Mtg hole
ø4.5
57.5
63.5
76
Bus t max. =4
ø5.5
5.5
6
1-pole
2-pole
3-pole 13.5
12
Bus drilling
Note: Two mounting brackets are used for single-pole breakers.
and four for two-pole and three-pole breakers.
144

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Miniature Circuit Breakers
BH-PS
Type
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 40°C
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
Breaking
capacity
AC230/400V
IEC60898
AC400V
(kA) sym. — DC125V
1
10, 15, 20,
30, 40, 50,
60
230/400
—
3
—
—
BH-PS M3
2 3
10, 15, 20,
30, 40, 50,
60
400
125
—
3
15, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60
400
—
1 —
1
6, 10, 16,
20, (25), 32,
40, 50, 60
230/400
9
—
BH-PS M9
2 3
10, 16, 20,
(25), 30, 40,
50, 60
400
—
—
—
9
10, 16, 20,
(25), 32, 40,
50, 60
400
Type BH-PS
■Operating Characteristics
■Ambient Compensating Curve
4h
140
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min
6min
4min
Operating Characteristics
Type:BH-PS
Rated Current:5~60A
Amb. temp.:40°C
Current rating (%)
135
130
125
120
115
110
105
100
15-20A, 40A
10A
6A, 30A, 32A
50A, 60A
Rated ambient
2min
95
1min
Max.
90
85
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
Min.
80
0 10 30 40
20 50 60
Ambient temperature (°C)
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
Type B
Type C
Type D
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30 40
×100% of rated current
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BH-PS
57.5 7.5
Plug-in terminal
(line side)
71.5
81.5
25
25
50
25 25
75
M5 x 0.8
screw
60.5
65.5
79
Mtg slot
22 47 72
4.5
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole
14
145

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
DIN Series
BH-D6
MCB
BH-D6 (IEC60898)
Number of poles
1
2
3
4 (3+N) 2 (1+N)
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,
25, 32, 40, 50, 63
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,
25, 32, 40, 50, 63
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,
25, 32, 40, 50, 63
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,
25, 32, 40, 50, 63
6, 10, 13, 16, 20,
25, 32, 40
Rated voltage (VAC)
230/400
400
400
400 230
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898)
6
Type BH-D6
■Operating Characteristics
Min
s
Min
s
200
100
50
30
20
10000
5000
2000
1000
Tripping Characteristics
Type:BH-D6
Rated Current:6A-63A
Amb. temp.:30°C
200
100
50
30
20
10000
5000
2000
1000
Tripping Characteristics
Type:BH-D6
Rated Current:6A-63A
Amb. temp.:30°C
10
500
10
500
5
5
200
200
2
1
100
50
30
Max.
2
1
100
50
30
Max.
Tripping time
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
Min.
B
C
Tripping time
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
Min.
6-10A
13-63A
D
0.05
Max total
0.05
0.02
tripping time
0.02
0.01
0.6
0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
×100% of rated current
0.01
0.6
0.7 1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 15 20 30
×100% of rated current
6
■Ambient Compensating Curve
135
130
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BH-D6
M5 screw
Neutral Pole
125
N
N
120
Current ratings (%)
115
110
105
100
95
Rated
ambient
45
44.5
87
92
90
N
N
85
-10 -5 0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Ambient temperature (°C)
18
18
36
18
36
36
54
18
54
72
Insulation
Barrier(Option)
17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
1-pole 1+N-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
146

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
DIN Series
BH-DN
MCB
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Breaking capacity (kA) sym. (IEC60898)
BH-DN (IEC60898)
2 (1+N)
6, 10, 16, 20
230
4.5
Type BH-DN
■Operating Characteristics
Min
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
2
1
Sec
10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
Max
Tripping Characteristics
Type : BH-DN
Rated current : 6A~20A
Amb.temp. : 30°C
2
Min
1
Tripping time
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
Max.total
tripping time
0.01
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 6 10 15
0.6 0.7 20
5 7 30
× Rated current
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BH-DN
M4 SCREW
18
8.4
N
N
45
70 maximum
6 44 17
Solderless Terminal
45
88
147

BV-D
RCCB
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆
Pulsating current sensitivity
Rated conditional short-cirrent (kA)
BV-D (IEC61008)
2 (1+N) 4 (3+N)
25, 40, 63
230 230/400
30, 300
0.04
Type AC
6
Type BV-D
■Operating Characteristics
Operating time
2h
1h
30min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
Rated nonoperating current sensitivity
Rated current sensitivity
0.02s
0.01s
25
50 100 500
Ground fault current
(% of rated current sensitivity)
6
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BV-D
Residual
M5 screw Test button indicator Neutral pole
N
45
85
42.5
N
18
36
18
54
72
17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
2-pole
4-pole
148

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
DIN Series
BV-DN
RCBO
Number of poles
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Rated current sensitivity I∆n (mA)
Max. operating time (sec) at 5I∆n
Pulsating current sensitivity
Breaking capacity (kA) sym (IEC61009)
BV-DN (IEC61009)
2 (1+N)
6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
230
30, 100, 300
0.04
Type AC
4.5
Type BV-DN
■Operating Characteristics
■Leakage Tripping characteristics
Min
200
100
50
30
20
Sec
10000
5000
2000
1000
Tripping Characteristics
Type : BV-DN
Rated current : 6A~32A
Amb.temp. : 30°C
4h
2h
1h
30min
10min
10
5
2
1
500
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
Max
Operating time
4min
2min
1min
30s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
Rated nonoperating current
Rated current sensitivity
2
Min
0.1s
0.04s
1
0.02s
Tripping time
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
Max.total
tripping time
0.01s
25 50 100
500
Ground-fault current
(% of rated current sensitivity)
0.02
0.01
1 1.13 1.45 2 3 4 6 10 15
0.6 0.7 20
5 7 30
× Rated current
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•BV-DN
M4 Screw
Test button
8.4
36
N
N
Residual indicator
45
6
44
70 maximum
17
88
45
Solderless
terminal
149

KB-D
Isolating switch
Number of poles
Utilization category
Rated current (A)
at ambient temperature 30°C
Rated voltage (VAC)
Shot time withstand current (A)
Shot-circuit making capacity (A)
KB-D (IEC60947-3)
1 2 3 4 (3+N)
AC22A class
32, 63, 80
230 400
20 × In, 1s
20 × In
Type KB-D
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•KB-D
M5 screw
Neutral Pole
N
45
87
92
44.5
N
18 36
18 36 54
18
54
72
Insulation
Barrier(Option)
17 44 6
70 maximum
Solderless terminal
6
1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole
150

6. Characteristics and Dimensions
Circuit Protectors
CP30-BA
Type CP30-BA
Number of poles
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Rated current (A)
Rated shortcircuit
capacity (kA)
AC-DC common use
Operating characteristics
Mode of tripping
UL1077
CSA C22.2 No.235
IEC 60934
EN 60934
GB 17701
JIS C 4610
EN 60947-2
IEC 60947-2
JIS C 8201-2
(Icu/Ics)
Frame (A) 30
Type
CP30-BA
Rated voltage (V)
AC
DC
AC (V)
DC (V)
1 2 3
2.5
0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5,
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10,15, 20, 30
250
65 125 —
2.5kA at 250V
2.5kA at 65V 2.5kA at 125V —
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
250
2.5kA at 230V
DC
2.5kA at 60V 2.5kA at 120V —
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
250
AC
2.5/2.5kA at 230V
DC
2.5/2.5kA at 60V 2.5/2.5kA at 120V —
—
Instantaneous type (I)
Medium type (M),(MD)
Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only
Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F):hydraulic-magnetic
■Operating Characteristics
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S)
AC
DC
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
DC
AC
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
DC
AC
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
DC
AC
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.02s
0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
0.01s
0.01s
100 100 300 1000
200 500 2000 5000 10000
135 100 300 200 500
10000
1000 135
5000 300
2000 1000
200 500 2000 5000
150 10000
180
125 400 700
125 400 700 125 400 700
0.02s
0.01s
135 200
1000
100 300 500 2000
125 400 700
5000 10000
Current (% of rated current)
Current (% of rated current)
Current (% of rated current)
Current (% of rated current)
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•CP30-BA
19.5
12
1
Terminal
cover
37
29.5 1
Terminal
cover
54.5
47
1
Terminal
cover
Terminal cover
33
IEC 35mm
rail
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Medium type with inertial delay (MD)
2h
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
56
ON
56
ON
56
54
ON
90
65
67
9.5 39
63
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Operating time
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
9.5 9.5
17.5
AXc
AXb
AXa
1-pole
Mounting dimension
9.5
17.5 17.5 17.5
35
52.5
17.5 17.5
AXc
2-pole
AXb
AXa
54
3-pole
AXc
AXb
AXa
14
Mounting hole
ø4.5
Terminal cover for
attached terminal
block
5
22.5
35 5.5
63
65 3
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal block
(Ic contact)
Attachable on right-side only
Alarm or auxiliary switch terminal M3.5
(Plus minus self-up screw)
(The figure shows auxiliary switch.
Example: Alarms are ALa, ALb and ALc.)
Main terminal
(Plus minus self-up screw)
M4·····20A max.
M5·····30A
5
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 300 1000
200 500 2000
400 125 700
Current (% of rated current)
■Temperature Characteristics
Operating time variation (%)
300
250
200
150
100
90
80
70
60
0.2s
0.1s
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
5000 10000
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
125 400 700
Current (% of rated current)
Rated
ambient
5000
10000
12 29.5 47
-10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1-pole 2-pole
2-M tap
3-pole
2-M tap
2-M4 tap
Tightening torque 1~1.4 (N-m)
(Rated ambient 40°C)
151

CP-S
Type CP-S
Frame (A) 30
Type
CP-S
Number of poles
1 2 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
2.5
Rated current (A)
Rated shortcircuit
capacity (kA)
AC-DC common use
Operating characteristics
Mode of tripping
UL1077
IEC 60934
EN 60934
(Icn)
JIS C 4610
(Icn)
AC (V)
Rated voltage (V)
DC (V)
AC
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
DC
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V)
AC
DC
0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.3, 0.5, 0.75
1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 7, 7.5, 10,15, 20, 25, 30
250
65
1.5kA at 250V
1kA at 65V
—
—
—
—
250
1.5kA at 230V, 2.5kA at 120V
1kA at 60V
1kA at 120V
(1kA at 60V)
1kA at 60V
250
1.5kA at 250V, 2.5kA at 125V
1kA at 65V
1kA at 125V
(1kA at 65V)
1kA at 65V
—
Instantaneous type (I)
Medium type (M),(MD)
Slow type (S),(SD) Fast type (F),(FD)
Instantaneous type (I): magnetic only
Other type (M, MD, S, SD, F, FD):hydraulic-magnetic
■Operating Characteristics
Instantaneous type (I) Fast type (F) Medium type (M) Slow type (S) Medium type with inertial delay (MD)
2h
2h
2h
2h
2h
1h
1h
1h
1h
1h
40min
40min
40min
40min
40min
20min
20min
20min
20min
20min
10min
6min
4min
10min
6min
4min
10min
6min
4min
10min
6min
4min
10min
6min
4min
2min
2min
2min
2min
2min
1min
1min
1min
1min
1min
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Operating time
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.2s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.1s
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.05s
0.02s
0.02s
0.02s
0.02s
0.02s
0.01s
80 100 200 300 500 1000 2000 5000
125 400 700
Current
(% of instantaneous tripping current set value)
0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
125 400 700
Current
(% of rated current)
5000 10000
0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
125 400 700
Current
(% of rated current)
5000 10000
0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
2h
125 400 700
Current
(% of rated current)
5000 10000
Fast type with inertial delay (FD)
0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
2h
125 400 700
Current
(% of rated current)
5000 10000
Slow type with inertial delay (SD)
6
■Outside Dimension Diagram
•CP-S
Series
Switch
Main terminal
Mail tab terminal nominal 250
(8.35W × 0.8L)
Operating time
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
Operating time
1h
40min
20min
10min
6min
4min
2min
1min
30s
20s
10s
5s
2s
1s
0.5s
LINE
0.2s
0.1s
0.2s
0.1s
39
7.3
8.8
11.5
Alarm · auxiliary switch terminal
Tab terminal nominal 110
(2.8W × 0.5L)
LORD
40
49.5
3.3
55 18
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
125 400 700
Current
(% of rated current)
5000 10000
0.05s
0.02s
0.01s
100 200 300 500 1000 2000
125 400 700
Current
(% of rated current)
5000 10000
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
M3 × 0.5 tap
(Depth 5)
■Temperature Characteristics
300
ø15
19
26.5
42
51
ø15
42
51
19 19 19
38
57
Single pole 2-pole 3-pole
26.5
ø15
26.5
42
51
Operating time variation (%)
250
200
150
100
90
80
70
60
-10
Rated
ambient
0 10 20 25 30 40 50 60
(Rated ambient 25°C)
152

7. Ordering Information
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Earth-Leakage Circuit Breakers
Type name
NF250-SW
C
S
NF
H
U
MB
Economy type
Standard type
High-performance type
Ultra current-limiting type
Motor braker
Type name
NV250-SW
NV
C
S
H
U
Economy type
Standard type
High-performance type
Ultra current-limiting type
Number of poles
Number of poles
2P
NV
1ø2W
3P
NF
MB
2P, 3P, 4P
3P
3P
3P
NV
1ø2W
1ø3W
3ø3W
Rated current
200A
Even for adjustable rated current
models, the working current should be
specified.
Rated current
200A
4P
NV
3ø4W
Even for adjustable rated current
models, the working current should be
specified.
Rated voltage
Secify DC voltage when for use in
DC circuit
Rated voltage
AC
AC
100-440V
200-440V
Standard
Specify the applicable marine
standards
∗ “CE” is standard.
Rated sensitivity
current
100 • 200 • 500mA
30mA
100 • 200 • 500mA
Connection
method
B
F
SL
B
PM
Front connection
Solderless (box) terminal
Rear connection
Pulg-in
Standard
Specify “CE”, if necessery
Built-in
Accessories
PAL
PAL
OAL
CYL
Pre-alarm (contact output)
Overcurrent alarm
Cylinder keylock
Connection
method
B
F
SL
B
PM
Front connection
Solderless (box) terminal
Rear connection
Pulg-in
Internal
accessories
AL, SHT (AC110V)
External
accessories
AL
AX
SHT
UVT
SLT
INT
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Shunt trip
(Specify rated coil voltage.)
Under voltage trip
(Specify rated coil voltage.)
Lead-wire terminal block
Internal terminal type
Type of residual
carrent protection
Built-in
Accessories
MG
Blank
Specify
MG
EAL
TBM
PAL
High-speed type
Time-delay type
Insulation switch
Earth-leakage circuit alarm switch
Test button module
Pre-alarm module
Quantity
10
MD
F • S • V
S • I • W
MI
TC
LC • HL
HL-S
CH
Electrical operation device
Operating handle
Enclosure box
Mechanical interlock
Terminal cover
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
Handle lock device
Card holder
Internal
accessories
AX, SLT, TBM
External
accessories
AL
AX
UVT
SLT
MD
F • S • V
S • I • W
MI
Alarm switch
Auxiliary switch
Under voltage trip
(Specity rated coil voltage)
Lead-wire terminal block
Electrical operation device
Operating handle
Enclosure box
Mechanical interlock
Quantity
TC
Terminal cover
(TC-L, TC-S, TTC, BTC)
10
LC • HL
HL-S
Handle lock device
CH
Card holder
153

8. Melshort 2
A more rational and easier breakers selections
This software program ensures the easy selection of low-voltage
circuit breakers according to the required rated breaking capacity
and the related equipments
Calculation and selection software
for low-voltage circuit breakers
Preparation of single-line diagram
Coodination between high-voltage protection equipments
Short-circuit current calculation
Examination of cascade interruption combination
Examination of selective interraption
●Contents of a software
The program's menu allows not only short-circuit current
calculations but also the examination of various
protection coordination.
●Preparation of single-line connection diagrams.
●Short-circuit calculations.
●Automatic selection of breaker type.
●Selection of breaker type for cascade interruption combination.
●Selection of breaker type for selective interruption combination.
●Examination of coordination between high-voltage protection
equipments.
●Protection coordination with motor start current.
■Selectable products menu
Advantages
●Improvement of selection efficiency
Because the coordination between various protection
systems can be examined and breakers can be selected
interactively using the personal computer screen, simple,
accurate and speedy operation is ensured.
●Maintenance of a software
The user can download the latest software updates by
accessing Mitsubishi's LVS home page on the Internet.
http://www.fukuyama.melco.co.jp/lvs
■Personal computer specifications
7
8
Low-voltage circuit breaker:
MCCBs, ELCBs, ACBs, MCBs, Contactors,
Thermal relays, High-voltage OCRs
Operating system: Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000/XP
CPU: 166 MHz or faster
RAM memory size: min 32 MB
Free hard disk capacity: min 50 MB
Display resolution: min 640 × 480 dots
CD-ROM Drive:Double speed or higher
154

9. LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEARS TECHNICAL
http://global.MitsubishiElectric.com/lvs
Advantages
■Substantial menu
Wide ranging technical information is classified into 6 groups.
■Expert oriented information
In addition to catalogs, including previous catalog editions and
technical data and other information, users get answers to their
technical questions.
■Enhanced information collection efficiency
By connecting your personal computer to the Internet, you can access
the latest information simply and quickly without a need to increase
storage space.
Model menu
■Molded-Case
Circuit Breakers
(MCCB)
■Earth-Leakage
Circuit Breakers
(ELCB)
■Miniature
Circuit Breakers
(MCB)
·······
Since 1933, when Japan's first molded
case circuit breaker was released, we
have continuously provided circuit
breakers with monitors to ensure
uninterrupted power supplies, the world's
first harmonics current proof and surge
proof IC earth leakage circuit breakers,
and other new products as needed. We
have completed a 21st Century
progressive super services for the circuit
breaker. In doing so, we have focused on
urgently required advanced technology
and futuristic ease of use.
■Circuit Protectors
(CP)
■Air Circuit Breakers
(ACB)
······
······
Compact, high-performance protectors
against short-circuit and overload, and for
control circuit operation for electronic
equipment, office machinery, and
machine tools.
All models have electronic tripping relays
ensuring high reliability and excellent
performance.
155

INFORMATION SERVICE VIA THE INTERNET
■Catalogue
●The latest catalogue and old editions are
displayed for reading as is.
■Technical Infomation
●Access technical and maintenance data on
our low-voltage switchgear.
■Selection (Available soon)
●Downloading to the latest CD-ROM software
version (purchased separately) ensuring easy
short circuit current calculation of our low-
voltage switchgears and type selection.
Downloading is available only those who purchase
CD-ROM ''MELSHORT2'' for Mitsubishi selection.
■Contact us at :
●Information center
Our area by area sales centers and contact sites
around the world are conveniently located.
●Technical support questions
Access information on products, handling, and
maintenance of low-voltage switchgear via the
Internet.
●Web problems: Comment
If you have comments on the technical
information service, please contact us via the
Internet.
■Standard
●Access international standards
for specific types.
Related site
We provide technical information on products via the
Internet as well as low-voltage switch-gear technical
information service.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation M's DINER Home page
···http://www.melco.co.jp/index_e.htm
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation GLOBAL Home page
···http://www.mitsubishi.com/
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.–Germany
···http://www.mitsubishi-automation.com/
9
156

MEMO

Country / Region Company Address Telephone
Australia
Belgium
Chile
Mitsubishi Electric Australia Pty. Ltd
Emac S.A.
RHONA S.A.
348 Victoria Road, Rydalmere, N.S.W. 2116, Australia
Industrialaan 1, B-1702 Groot-Bijgaarden, Belgium.
Vte. Agua Santa 4211 Casilla 30-D (P.O. Box)
Viña Del Mar. Chile
+61-2-9684-7586
+32-(0)2-4810211
+56-32-320652
China
Colombia
Denmark
Egypt
Germany
Greece
Hong Kong
Indonesia
Ireland
Italy
Laos
Lebanon
Myanmer
Nepal
New Zealand
Norway
Pakistan
Philippines
Poland
Saudi Arabia
Singapore
Slovenia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
The Netherlands
Turkey
U.K.
Uruguay
Venezuela
Vietnam
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Shanghai)
Limited
Cra 53 No 29C-73 U.I.C.- Medellin.
Proelectrico Representaciones S.A.
COLOMBIA.
Louis Poulsen CO. A/S
Geminivej 32, DK-2670 Greve, Denmark.
P.O. BOX: 165-11516, Maglis El-Shaab
CAIRO ELECTRICAL GROUP
Cairo-Egypt.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. German Branch. Gothaer Strasse 8, 40880 Ratingen, Germany.
Drepanias Antonios S.A.
Mitsubishi Electric Automation (Hong Kong)
Limited
P.T.SAHABAT INDONESIA.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Irish Branch.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. Italy
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION
KOREA CO., LTD.
SOCIETE LAO IMPORT-EXPORT
COMPTOIR D'ELECTRICITE
GENERALE-Liban
PEACE MYANMAR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Watt & Volt House Co., Ltd.
Melco Sales (N.Z.) Ltd.
SCANELEC
Prince Electric Co.
EDISON ELECTRIC INTEGRATED, INC.
MPL Technology Sp zo.o.
CENTER OF ELECTRICAL GOODS
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE LTD.
INEA d.o.o.
Circuit Breaker Industries LTD.
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.
Spanish Branch.
Euro Energy Components AB
Trielec A G
Setsuyo Enterprise Co., Ltd.
UNITED TRADING & IMPORT CO. LTD.
Imtech Marine & Offshore
GTS
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V.
UK-Branch.
Fierro Vignoli S.A.
ADESCO C.A.
SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD.
52, Arkadias
STR.GR 121 32. Peristeri Athens Greece.
10/F Manulife Tower 169 Electric Road North
Point. Hong Kong.
JL Muara Karang Selatan Blok A/Utara No.1
kav. NO.11 P.O. Box 5045/Jakarta/11050.
Jakarta Indonesia.
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount, Dublin 24, Ireland.
C.D.Colleoni-P.Perseo lng.2, Via Paracelso 12
1-20041 Agrate Brianza (M1)
2 Fl. Dong Seo Game Channel Bldg., 1F 660-11
Deungchon-Dong, Kanguseo-Ku, Seoul, 157-030 Korea
43-47 Lane Xang Road P.O. BOX 2789 VT
Vientiane, Laos
Cebaco Center-Block A. Autostrade Dora,
P.O. BOX: 11-2597 Beirut-Lebanon.
NO. 137/139 Botataung Pagoda Road,
Botataung Town Ship 11161, Yangon, Myanmar.
KHA 2-65, Volt House Dilli Bazar Post Box: 2108,
kathmandu, Nepal
1 Parliament Street Lower Hutt. New Zealand.
Leirvikasen 43B, N5020 Bergen, Norway.
16 Brandreth Road Lahore 54000. Pakistan.
24th Fl. Galleria Corporate Center Edsa Cr, Ortigas Ave.
Quezon City, Metro Manila. Philippines.
ul. Sliczna 36 31-444 Krakow, Poland.
P.O. BOX: 15955, Riyadh 11454,
Saudi Arabia.
307 Alexandra Road #05-01/02 Mitsubishi
Electric Building Singapore 159943
Ljubljanska 80, SI-61230 Domzale, Slovenia.
Private Bag 2016. Isando 1600, Johannesburg, South Africa
Caretera De Rubi 76-80, 08190 - Sant Cugat Del Valles
(Barcelona) Spain
Box 103 48 S-434 24 Kungsbcka, Sweden.
Mühlentalstrasse 136, 8201 Schaffhausen,
Switzerland
6F, NO. 105 Wu-Kung 3rd rd., Wu-Ku Hsiang,
Taipei Hsien Taiwan
77/12 Bumrungmuang Road, Klong Mahanak,
Pomprab Bangkok 10100.
Postbox 5054, NL-3008 AB-Rotterdam, Netherlands.
Fahri Gizden Sokak, Hacaloglu Apt. No.22/6
TR-80280 Gayrettepe/Istanbul, Turkey.
Travellers Lane, Hatfield, Herts, AL10 8xB, U.K.
P.O. box 20022/Suc Upae, Montevideo. Uruguay.
Lle 8, Calpon Elinsu,
La Urbina-EDO, Miranda P.O.
BOX 78034 Caracas 1074A., Venezuela
47-49 Hoang Sa St., Da Kao Ward, D.1, HCMC
+86-(0)21-6120-0808
+57-4-235-00-28
+45-(0)43-95-95-95
+20-2-7961337
+49-(0)2102-4860
+30-1-57-81-599-699
+852-28878870
+62-(0)21-6621780
+353-(0)1-4505007
Israel GINO INDUSTRIES LTD. 26, Ophir street, IL-32235 Haifa, Israel +972-(0)4-867 06 56
Korea
+82-2-3668-6567
Malaysia
mittric Sdn Bhd
80 Xin Chang Road 4th Floor
Shanghai Intelligence Fortune Leisure Plaza
Huang Pu district Shanghai 200003
P.R.China
12A, Jalan Pemberita U1/49, Temasya Industrial Park,
Glenmarie, 40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia
+390-39-60-531
+856-21-215043, 21-215110
+961-1-240455
+603-5569-3748
+95-(0)1-202589, 202449, 202590
+977-1-411330
+64-4-569-7350
+47-55-506000
+92-(0)42-7654342
+63-(0)2-643-8691
+48-(0)12-632-28-85
+966-1-4770149
+65-6473-2308
+386-(0)17-21 80 00
+27-11-928-2000
+34-93-595-3131
+46-(0)300-69 00 40
+41-(0)52-6258425
+886-(0)2-2298-8889
+66-223-4220-3
+31-(0)10-487 19 11
+90-(0)212-2674011
+44-(0)1707-276-100
+598-2-92-08-08
+58-2-241-7634
+84-8-910 4763 / 4758 / 4759
Safety Tips : Be sure to read the instruction manual fully before using this product.
FACTORY AUTOMATION SYSTEM: TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
Y-0642A 0701 printed in Japan(MDOC)
Revised publication, effective Jan. 2007.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
This pamphlet is made from recycled paper.